Home

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

1. Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Scheduled Output Data per 6 6 Point Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 24 Isolated sourc NOTES 1 All terminals with the same isolated DC 0 o pe o 4 ol g OUT 0 o DC Olihg name are connected together DC 1 Ly OUT 1 on the module For example wiring S output j i DC 2 o DC 2 8 5 OUT 2 O DC 2 ring DC can be connected to DC 3 Hae 7 a OUT 3 either terminal marked DC 15 DC 4 m 10 39 OUT 4 2 Do not physically connect Sink output wiring DC 5 TEF 24 OUT 5 more than two wires toa DC 6 Oy DC 6 l Eu 130 OUT 6 o DC 6 single RTB terminal When DC 7 ORE OUT 7 you use the second DC 15I Jumper bar Cut to length DC 8 Qs 178 OUT 8 terminal to daisy chain to j DC 9 20 19 QUT 9 ae ee ti le DC 10 T2 21 OuT 10 the daisy chain as shown DC 11 4 i 2G ouT 1t i 3 Outputs can be wired in a sink Non isolated i f f oe DC 12 25 QUT 12 9 or source configuration as wiring DC 13 f ouT 13 1 9 Non isolated shown above DC 14 4 Zyl s0 oa ours 4 sourcing 4 The
2. as RPI LA TAN l A LA Owner controller ControlNet Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module Input module ET ael TE H Q o e Input data multicast in e e module s chassis at RPI af o A 9 Input data at least as often as RPI ControlNet 40947 The reserved spot on the network and the module s RPI are asynchronous to each other This means there are Best and Worst Case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated channel data from the module in a networked chassis Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 13 Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Best Case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast with updated channel data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remotely located owner controller receives the data almost immediately Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Worst Case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the owner controller will not receive data until the next available network slot m Enabling the COS fea
3. Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 34 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the Isolated L1 0 o L1 0 D2 1 OUT 0 N 0 L2 0 module For example L1 can be wiring L1 1 TET 3 OUT 1 N 0 connected to either terminal L1 2 o ie dares 5 amp OUT 2 N O o L2 2 L1 3 Die 7 OUT 3 N 0 Do not connect more than two DC 4 o 1 4 0 9 E OUT 4N 0 o DC 4 RTB terminal L1 5 qe 11 OUT 5 N O When you use the second L1 15 L1 6 TE 3 lour 6 N 0 terminal to daisy chain to other L1 7 te 15 JOUT 7 N O RTBs always connect the daisy Jumper bar Cut tolength 4 g ahs 17 Gy OUT 8N 0 L1 9 E 2 19 r JOUT 9 N O When using the jumper bar to L1 10 o2 21 OUT 10 N O daisy chain terminals together as N ndsolated L1 11 p24 23 OUT 11 N o shown the maximum current oa L1 12 26 2 6 OUT 12 N 0 you may apply to the module ae L1 13 Ta 27 LT OUT 13N 0 Ny through a single contact point L1 14 E 29 E OUT 14 N 0 L1 15 Jey ey OuT 15N 0
4. LS L2 L1 40175 M Simplified schematic L1 0 Surge Current Chart LED indicator Control Bus 45V j y Interface gt a 3 3 Pe AC OUTPUT Cc Ci Fused per group Surge Per group sonrasi O lt Display l 20A FUSE I 0 T oa 5 2 Per group ST 89 01112131415 L e 5A FUSE E 6 roo AW S 2A ieee ouT 0 0 5A _ lt Control Bus Interface ats 0 43ms 30341 M Time 40853 M 40458 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 48 Module Specific Information 1756 0A16 Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 400mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 2 1W Max Power Dissipation 6 5W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 22 17 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Point 0 5A maximum 60 C Per Group 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 4A maximum 60 C Surge Current Per Point 5A for 43 ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Per Group 15A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage 1 5V 0 5A Drop 5 7V load current lt 50mA Maximum Off State Leakage 3mA per point Current Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V us for loads lt
5. Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 23 Isolated sourc NOTES 1 All terminals with the same isolated DC 0 o DC 0 2 4 OUT 0 0 DC 0lihg name are connected together k h _ ne raodules F wiring DC 1 Ta 4 JEU OUT 1 output on the module For example DC 2 o DC 2 s QUT 2 DC 2 hiring DC can be connected to DC 3 4 hae OUT 3 either terminal marked DC 15 7 DC 4 T H 10 o0 OUT 4 2 Do not physically connect Sink output wiring DC 5 h2 on OUT 5 more than two wires toa DC 6 o Dc 6 TE li 92 OUT 6 o DC 6 single RTB terminal When FEN ore DC 7 116 46 OUT 7 you Use the second DC 15 Jumper bar Cut to length DC 8 las 47 OUT 8 terminal to daisy chain to i DC 9 20 19 OUT 9 other RIBS always connect DC 10 4 a2 ala OUT 10 the daisy chain as shown l DC 11 4 os oD OUT 11 b 3 Outputs can be wired in a sink Non isolated De 12 4 Es 2g ee l or source configuration as wiring DC 13 4 E2 2 OUT 13 l Non isolated shown above DC 14 4 E 0 2 OUT 14 b sourcing 4 The jumper bar part number output DC 15 32 31 OUT 15 ay gt o ae your DC O DC 15 3k aA Not used wiring Opa DC AN
6. Group 1 Group 0 Fuse Blown Word Point Level Group Level 1756 OA8E 1756 0A16 1756 OB8El 1756 OB16E A blown fuse for any point group sets the bit for that 1756 OV16E point group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the appropriate bit bits in the Module Fault Word 1756 0V32E FEER Group1 Group 0 Field Power Loss Word 1 41457 1756 OA8E only A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the Field Power Loss Word and also sets the appropriate bits in the Module Fault Word Chapter Summary and In this chapter you read about What s Next e determining input module compatibility e determining output module compatibility e using features common to ControlLogix standard digital I O modules e using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital input modules e using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital output modules Chapter 4 describes the ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Module Features Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 24 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Chapter 4 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features What This Chapter Contains This chapter descr
7. Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 G gt DC OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 9 ST 8 9 10111213 1415 Module Specific Information 7 87 1756 0G16 Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 210mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de Backplane Power 1 12W Maximum Power Dissipation 1 5w 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 5 2 BTU hr 60 C Operating Voltage 4 5 to 5 5V de source 50mV P P ripple maximum Voltage Category 5V de TTL Low True Low True Format The module operates with the following definitions of ON and OFF states OV to 0 4V de Output guaranteed to be in ON state 0 4 to 4 5V dc Output state not Guaranteed 4 5 to 5 5V dc Output guaranteed to be in OFF state Off State Leakage Current 0 1mA maximum Continuous Current 24mA maximum Load Current Per Point Per Module 0 15mA minimum 24mA maximum 384mA maximum On State Voltage Drop 0 4V de maximum Output Delay Time resistive load A5us nominal
8. Immediate backplane gt transfers to module Pd J iS Output data at least as often as R ControlNet 42675 The reserved spot on the network and when the controller sends the output data are asynchronous to each other This means there are Best and Worst Case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated channel data from the module in a networked chassis Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Best Case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remotely located output module receives the data almost immediately Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 17 Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the Worst Case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the output module does not receive data until the next available network slot Table 2 5 shows the Best Case and Worst Case times for output data sent from a controller to reach the output module Table 2 5 Best and Worst Case Times for Remote Output Data Transfer Best case time Backplane Network transfer times lt 1mS IMPORTANT Worst case time Twice the RPI rate These Best and Worst Case scenarios indicate the time required for output data to transfer from the owne
9. Locking tab 20854 M 3 Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 13 Removing the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis you must first Terminal Block A remove the RTB from the module Shock hazard exists If the RTB is removed from the module while the field side power is applied the module will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB s terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before removing the module 1 Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module 2 Open the RTB door using the bottom tab 3 Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the module IMPORTANT mond Do not wrap your fingers around the entire door A shock hazard exists 20855 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 5 14 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module Removing the Module 1 Push
10. 4 21 FUSIN ee San wes eco eas nes T Mec Gd et nd Bee end 4 22 ING Load Detector ied s iis fader Rh ee ROU eas 4 23 Field Side Output Veriicationies 4 4234 24 eo e054 G48 4 24 Pulse Testr 5 ne So 0 eRe AA OG te teh E ocx Ah wh ee Be 4 25 Point Level Electronic Fusing lt 2 254 0 Goss edie Dh as 4 26 Field Power Loss Detection 5 4 4224 See ees bac 4 28 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 4 29 Fault and Status Reporting Between Diagnostic Input Modules and Controllers i 4 oe dei oiey eee bey 4 29 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controller n on n Sp Reese ie oa a 4 31 Chapter Summary and What s Next 000 4 33 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Table of Contents 4 Chapter 5 Installing the ControlLogix What This Chapter Contains 040k ps e4 i au eee en 5 1 1 0 Module Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 1 Keying the Removable Terminal Block 5 3 Connecting Wiring loins ae sanaaa aaa a 5 4 Three Types of RTBs each RTB comes with housing 5 6 Recommendations for Wiring Your RTB 5 7 Assembling The Removable Terminal Block and the TOWING ai ky 4 Baty Ae aye PER OE Ores EEG 5 8 Choosing the Extended Depth Housing 5 9 Suggestions for Using the Extended Depth Housing 5 10 Cabinet Size Considerations With the Extended Depth Housing o a yp Spee 6 ey Beals 5 10 Instal
11. TTA 1 1 7 Communications Failure If communications fail in Program Mode Leave outputs in Program Mode state C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the I O module s power is cycled IMPORTANT Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 20 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Time Scheduled Output Control Time scheduled output control is a feature available on the first 8 outputs of the 1756 OB16IS module only Using the time scheduled output control feature the module can turn the outputs ON or OFF at a specific CST time You can set the time setpoint in 100us increments for the output to turn ON or OFF in the application program and the 1756 OB16IS module manages the time locally such that the output is turned ON or OFF at the time specified Using the Motion Axis Output Cam MAOC Instructions with Time Scheduled Output Control The MAOC instruction provides position based control of outputs using position and velocity information of any motion axis When the 1756 OB16IS module is specified as the output source for the MAOC instruction then the MAOC instruction automatically handles the time based output scheduling and enables it on the first 8 outputs on the 1756 OB16IS module The benefit of using output scheduling in this manner is that the resolution of the output
12. Number of Outputs 8N 0 amp 8 N C 2 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V de amp 100mA 24V de Backplane Power 2 9W Maximum Power Dissipation 3 1W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 10 57 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 265V 47 63Hz 5 150V de Output Voltage Range load dependent 5 30V de 2 0A resis 48V dc 0 5A resistiv 125V de 0 25A resistive 125V ac 2 0A resistive 240V ac 2 0A resistive ive a gt Output Current Rating at rated power nductive 2 0A steady state 5 30V de 0 5A steady state 48V dc 0 25A steady state 125V dc 2A 125V ac 2 0A steady state 15A make 125V ac 2A 240V ac 2 0A steady state 15A make 240V ac Resistive 2A 5 30V de 0 5A 48V de 0 25A 125V de Power Rating steady state 250W maximum for 125V ac resistive output 480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output 31W maximum for 125V dc resistive output 250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output 480VA maximum for 240V ac inductive output 60VA maximum for 30V de inductive output 24VA maximum for 48V dc inductive output 31VA maximum for 125V dc inductive output UL Ratings C300 R150 Pilot Duty Minimum Load Current 10mA point Initial Contact Resistance IMQ Switching Frequency 1 operation 3s 0 3Hz at rated load maximum
13. Time stamp of inputs 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Conductors l Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 34 Module Specific Information Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp
14. 1756 0B8EI gt DC OUTPUT T01234567 g k O 8 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 G gt DC OUTPUT 8 ST 012345670 FUSE 01234567 KO ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 OX8I C gt RELAY OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 E K 6 40464 1756 0A8 ON8 gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST 012345670 K 1756 0B16D gt DC OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 FT 01234567 ST 8 9 10 111213 1415 FLT 8 9 10111213 1415 6 DIAGNOSTIC 1756 0B32 OV32E gt DC OUTPUT ST 01234567 3 111111 9 ST 89 01 of 111 8 on on N ON N w Dw NN A w WN A 1756 0W16l gt RELAY OUTPUT 3 ST 012345670 ST 8 9 101112131415 Troubleshooting Your Module 8 5 Using RSLogix 5000 to In ce to T se lene on the ae hares 5000 po ei you to fault and other conditions You will be alerted in one of three Troubleshoot Your Module e Warning signal on the main screen next to the module This occurs when the connection to the module is broken e Message in a screen s status line e Notification in the Tag Editor General module faults are also reported in the Tag Editor Diagnostic faults are only reported in the Tag Editor e Status on the Module Info page
15. 36 18AWG wires 23 14AWG wires 40 14AWG wires 30484 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 5 10 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module Suggestions for Using the Extended Depth Housing Consider the following recommendations when deciding to use an extended depth housing on your I O module It is recommended you use the 1756 TBE when e using gt 36 18AWG wires e using gt 23 14AWG wires Cabinet Size Considerations With the Extended Depth Housing When you use an extended depth housing 1756 TBE the I O module depth is increased The diagram below shows the difference in terms of depth between an I O module using a standard depth housing and one using an extended depth housing Figure 5 10 n 144 73mm al 5 698in 12 7mm 131 75mm_ gt 0 5in gt lt 3 18mm 0 125in 5 187in X A Rear Surface of ControlLogix Chassis Standard Depth Housing Eee Extended Depth Housing J Pa ol 41682 eT The depth from front of the module to the back of the chassis is as follows standard depth housing 147 91mm 5 823in extended depth housing 157 43mm 6 198in Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 11 Installing the Removable Install the RT
16. The jumper bar part number is L1 o L1 15 E 3 ET Not used 97739201 Contact your local s Notused 8 35 ET Not used Rockwell Automation sales L2 representative to order additional Y jumper bars if necessary Daisy chain to other RTBs If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified 30240 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 24V gt RELAY OUTPUT L1 i 5 ST01234567 9 OUT ST 89 1011213415 K i o co 6 30337 M 40455 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 102 Module Specific Information 1756 OW16l Specifications Number of Outputs 16 N O Contacts individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 150mA 5 1V de amp 150mA 24V de 4 4W Total backplane power Maximum Power Dissipation 4 5W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 15 35 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 265V 47 63Hz 5 150V de Output Voltage Range 5 30V de 2 0A resistive load dependent 48V dc 0 5A resistive 25V dc 0 25A resistive 25V ac 2 0A resistive 240V ac 2 0A resistive UL Ratings C300 R150 Pilot Duty Minimum Load Current OmA per point Initial Contact Resistance 30mQ Switching Frequency operation 3s 0 3Hz at rated load maximum Bounce Time 1 2ms mean Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistive 100k cycles inductive Maximum Off State Leakage 1 5mA per point Current Output
17. 04 1 6 Removal and Insertion Under Power 1 6 Environment and Enclosure 0 00005 1 7 Chapter Summary and What s Next 1 8 Chapter 2 What This Chapter Contains 90 0 2 Yo ded do eee eee 2 1 DVIS ID ads scicse E Marcanin hese d cas BEML hy 6 Utne Bd wise ae 2 2 Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 2 2 Internal Module Operations o oo aaau 2 4 Input Mod less erpe 344 06 42 eee EEan p aipa eS 24 2 4 Output Modules noana 2 5 CONDECUONS A euen oc ov digg ah fe E a E a E 2 6 Direct Connections 4 4549 exe aoaaa 2 6 Rack CONMECHONS e 0 5 eap pa a maw p SS 2 7 Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage 2 8 Input Module Operation n naaa acne eee aw cee aie ee 2 9 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 04 2 10 Requested Packet Interval RPD 2 10 Change of State COS ove ie ta wees tbe we ei 2 10 Triggering Event Tasks dls ate a Bay Oe CSD RES 2 11 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 2 12 Remote Input Module Connected Via ControlNet 2 12 Remote Input Modules Connected Via EtherNet IP 2 14 Output Module Operation wie gdsre et y ary cd Goines bap 4 a oes 2 14 Output Modules in a Local Chassis 2 15 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 2 15 Remote Output Modules Connected Via ControlNet 2 16 Remote Output Modules Connected Via EtherNet IP 2 18 Listen Only
18. Bounce Time 1 2ms mean Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistive 100k cycles inductive Maximum Off State Leakage Current OmA Output Delay Time OFF to ON 13ms maximum ON to OFF 13ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Config States in Program Mode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels 100 tested at 2546V de for 1s RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Conductors Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry
19. Number of Outputs 32 16 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 300mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 1 58W Maximum Power Dissipation 4 8W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 16 37 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 31 2V de 50 C Linear derating 10 28V de 60 C Output Current Rating Per Point 0 5A maximum 50 C Linear derating 0 35A maximum 60 C Per Module 16A maximum 50 C Linear derating 10A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 1A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 3mA per point Maximum On State Voltage 200mV dc 0 5A Drop Maximum Off State Leakage 0 5mA per point Current Output Delay Time OFF to ON 55us nominal 1ms maximum ON to OFF 200us nominal 1ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Reve
20. Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications
21. 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 F 8 Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module Table F1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable catalog or n mb r Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 0C8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 1492 CABLExW x cable length 4 terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 0G16 1756 0H8I 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS 120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 ON8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 FM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs a
22. 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the Output is shorted to L2 output as OFF output as OFF 2 Fuse Blown bit is set 2 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the No Load or output is shorted output as ON output as OFF to L1 2 Pulse Test fails 2 No Load bit is set 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the L1 or L2 are disconnected or output as OFF output as OFF outside the 47 63Hz 2 No Load shows a Fault 2 No Load bit is set frequency range 3 Field Power Loss shows a Fault 3 Field Power Loss bit is set 4 Pulse Test fails 4 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the Hardware point damage output as ON 2 output as OFF 2 Pulse Test fails Output Verify bit is set 1 2 3 4 5 When pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary p The output cannot turn ON due to hardware point damage Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output veri Isation on the module display fy fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned OFF It is not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the OFF state If a short circuit occurs the output point is turned
23. MESSAGE pulse_slt4_b0 DINT 5 Binary F F reset_slt4_b0 F pulse_results_slt4 DINT 1 Decimal Pluse_Results_Slot4 DINT 1 Binary Local 3 1 4B 1756_DI_DC_ Local 3 C AB 1756_DI_DC_ 4 Local 8 1 AB 1756_DI_Time H Local 8 C H Local 7 0 4B 1756_D1 C 0 4B 1756_D0 0 0 a gt f Monitor Tags Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 The user defined WHO data structure displays module identification information in an easily understood format For example major revision displays that the module s major revision is 2 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration B 13 Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module identification and status through a WHO service In this application a message instruction retrieves the following module identification information e Product type e Product code e Major revision e Minor revision e Status e Vendor e Serial number e String length e Ascii string A full explanation of each module identification category above is provided after the ladder logic application Totem This example uses a user defined WHO data structure and a series of Copy instructions following the Message instruction in the screen capture below
24. Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 60 Module Specific Information 1756 OA8E Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 200mA 5 1V de amp 250mA 24V de Total backplane power 7 02W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 5 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 18 76 BTU h Output Voltage Range 74 132V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Group 4A maximum 30 C amp 2A max 60 C Linear derating Per Module 8A maximum 30 C amp 4A max 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage 4V peak 2A Drop Maximum Off State Leakage 3mA per point Current Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Diagnostic Functions Short Trip gt 20A for 100ms minimum Field Power Loss Zero Detects at 25V peak minimum Firmware phase locked loop Cross Time stamp of Ims Diagnostics Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Mode Point Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to CST Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 25V peak Fusing Electr
25. Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 5 Table 5 1 Wiring Connections Catalog number Wiring diagram on 1756 0A16 page 7 47 1756 0A16l page 7 50 1756 O0A8 page 7 53 1756 OA8D page 7 56 1756 OA8E page 7 59 1756 0B16D page 7 62 1756 OB16E page 7 65 1756 0B161 page 7 68 1756 OB161S page 7 71 1756 0B32 page 7 74 1756 OB8 page 7 77 1756 OB8E page 7 80 1756 0C8 page 7 83 1756 0616 page 7 86 1756 OH8 page 7 89 1756 ON8 page 7 92 1756 OV16E page 7 95 1756 OV32E page 7 98 1756 OW16 page 7 101 1756 OX8l page 7 104 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 5 6 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module Three Types of RTBs each RTB comes with housing e Cage Clamp Catalog number 1756 TBCH e NEMA Clamp Catalog number 1756 TBNH e Spring Clamp Catalog number 1756 TBSH or TBS6H Cage Clamp 1 Insert the wire into the terminal 2 Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire Figure 5 5 Strain relief area O O 20859 M NEMA Clamp 1 Strip 5 16 inch 8mm maximum length of wire 2 Turn the terminal screw counterclockwise 3 Insert stripped end of wire under plate on the terminal 4 Turn the terminal screw clockwise until wire is secured Figure 5 6 O G 5 PY oy A a deog an WW N i 3 IN ZIN Go J Q
26. when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions EEx 4 European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection m I Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Use this conductor category info mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 44 1756 IV3 NOTES 1 Module Specific Information 2 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example DC COM can be connected to either terminal marked GND 1 Do no
27. 19 2 30V de e utput Current Rating Per Point Per Module 2A maximum 30 C amp 1A maximum 60 C Linear derating 8A maximum 30 C amp 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 1s Minimum Load Current 3mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 2V de 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 55s nominal 1ms maximum ON to OFF 630us nominal 5ms maximum Diagnostic Functions Short trip 8A for 180ms minimum 10A for 120ms minimum No load OFF STATE detection only Output verification ON STATE detection only Pulse test User selectable maximum pulse width Timestamp of 1ms diagnostics Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Fusing Electronically fused per point Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Soft
28. 1ms Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Electronically fused per group Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 30V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 30V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 67 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Op IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb O 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F erating Dry Heat perating Thermal Shoc Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un IEC 60068
29. About This User Manual This preface describes how to use this manual Table Preface 1 For information about See page Who Should Use This Manal n T Prefed Purpose of This Manual Preface 1 What This Manual Contains Preface 2 Related Products and Documentation Preface 3 You must be able to program and operate a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix controller to efficiently use your analog I O modules We assume that you know how to do this in this manual If you do not refer to the Logix5000 controller documentation before you attempt to use this module Table Preface 3 on page Preface 3 lists related documentation This manual describes how to install configure and troubleshoot your ControlLogix digital I O modules Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Preface 2 What This Manual Contains Table Preface 2 lists describes the sections contained in this manual Table Preface 2 Section Title Description Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules A general overview of the ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules and how they are used Chapter 2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Description of how ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules work with in a ControlLogix system Chapter 3 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features Listing of the features that are common to all standard ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules Chapter 4 ControlLogix Diagnostic
30. Allen Bradley ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Input Modules 1756 1A16 IA16l 1A32 IA8D B16 1B16D 1B16l IB32 B 1 16 1G16 IH16l IM16l IN16 IV16 IV32 Output Modules 1756 0A16 0A16l OA8 OA8D OA8E 0B16D 0B16E 0B16l OB16lS 0B32 OB8 OB8EI 0C8 0G16 OH8I ON8 OV16E OV32E OW16l OX8l User Manual Rockwell Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc
31. Chapter Summary and What s Next When you create a module a set of tags are created by the ControlLogix system that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of RSLogix 5000 Each configurable feature on your module has a distinct tag that can be used in the processor s ladder logic You can access a module s tags through RSLogix 5000 as shown below RSLogix 5000 Digital_IO0 1756 L63 File Edit View Search Logic Communications aea S ete Sle 3 Offline 0 RUN A No Forces a pK No Edits a E vo 4 SJ Controller Digital_10 cap Controller Tags Controller Fa New Tag Ctrlewt PowerUp ts Monitor Tags amp MainT ask Edit Tags amp MainPror Verify i Unschedulec Export Tags Motion Groups P PA Mnerewined 4 Print CP You can view the tags from here o er Tags Digita ontrolle Scope Digita lO controller x Show Show Al z Sot Tag Name z Tag Name 2 Value Force Mask Style gt Fi Local1 C ay Local1 1 Local 2 C Locak2 1 Local 2 0 Locak3 C Local 3 1 F Local 4 C F Local 4 1 F Local 4 0 Remote_communications_module Remote_communications_module 0 alalalalalalalalalalala ajala bs a a eo es es es es as peo eg pene peer ee erg peer beer erg Deer oe pea Peg Keer jjj reer beer Peg berg bee F Monitor Tags A Ed
32. 0 5mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF 1ms maximum 2ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM will protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Conductors Wire Size Category 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum 4 2 8 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module
33. 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged 50g shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz from 30MHz to 1000MHz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equ CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locat FM FM Approved Equipment for use A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab EN 50082 2 Industria EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immu EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emi EEx 4 European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX
34. 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Oscillatory Surge IEEE C37 90 1 Withstand 4kV Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industri
35. Appendix F Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Description of the bulletin 1492 interface modules Module Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 IFM available for use with ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules Related Products and Documentation Preface 3 The following table lists related ControlLogix products and documentation Table Preface 3 Related Documentation Catalog Document title Publication number number 1756 A4 A7 ControlLogix Chassis Installation Instructions 1756 IN080 A10 A13 1756 PA72 B ControlLogix Power Supply Installation 1756 5 67 PB72 B Instructions 1756 PA75 ControlLogix Power Supply Installation 1756 5 78 PB75 Instructions 1756 Series ControlLogix Module Installation Instructions Multiple 1756 IN Each module has separate installation numbers document 1756 Series ControlLogix Analog 1 0 Modules User Manual 1756 UM058 1756 CNB ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control CNET UMO01 CNBR Systems User Manual 1756 DNB DeviceNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems DNET UM004 User Manual 1756 DHRIO ControlLogix Data Highway Plus Communication 1756 UM514 Interface Module User Manual 1756 ENBT EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control ENET UMO01 ENET Systems User Manual 1756 Lx ControlLogix Selection Guide 1756 SG001 1756 Lx ControlLogix System User Manual 1756 UM001 1756 Lx 17
36. EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 77 1756 0B8 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 26 Daisy chain to cae other RTBs DC 0 ee ie 4l 4 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same T i name are connected on the Be ie Hb module For example DC DC 0 q i COM can be connected to r se IB I scien either te
37. Fea Wes we Hace i 7 74 1750 OBS 5 Fcn Ake Guil Gu 8 ple a Re tO Geel ooh eae don i 7 77 1756 OB8EL a a Pe bet Nh vole Yh ee Ae eat hes a 7 80 1756 OCS uate og elit gn Phe wei bod hha eRe eae 7 83 DAGON Oc i norida ste for Be ht Sale a ao sore GAS Bes 7 86 T756 OBE y enad chide fo wet ee ark eke wi Gaal dd aie Bee Ge 7 89 L5G ONG iS cea oe Ks hadnt ed Deak hee TO ek 7 92 1756 OVI 6E neos i a a absense a ORES peapa me Be hnit 7 95 17560 OV32 Bre aia o eaea ahd ele Ae os ee eel A E 7 98 SCOOT aod aed ENG 7 101 T75G2OXBSL oc cg PAL eae St eS Oe EE Ree SSE SES 7 104 Chapter Summary and What s Next 7 107 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Table of Contents 6 Troubleshooting Your Module Tag Definitions Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Power Supply Sizing Chart Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Hardware Response Times Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module Glossary Index Chapter 8 What This Chapter Contains Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your Module Status Indicators for Input Modules Status Indicators for Output Modules Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your Module Determining Fault Type Chapter Summary and What s Next Appendix A Module Tag Names and Definitions Standard Input Module Tags iG aa 4 Gaurd Be qieeaen Standard Output Module Tags Diagnostic Inp
38. GND 15 Ay 34 33 Not used DC gt a Not used 3 3e Not used Neg A 40167 M Daisy chain to other RTBs LED indicator 5V 9 _ DC INPUT YE 2 ST 012345670 4 ST 89 101112131415 K GND gt 6 ControlBus Display Interface 30183 M 20945 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 33 1756 1H161 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 Individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 125mA 5 1V de amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 71W Maximum Power Dissipation 5W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 17 05 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 90 146V de Derated as follows 90 146V de 50 C 12 Channels ON same time 90 132V de 55 C 14 Channels ON same time 90 125V de 60 C 16 Channels ON same time 90 146V de 30 C 16 Channels ON same time Nominal Input Voltage 125V de On State Current 1mA 90V de minimum 3mA 146V de maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 20V de Maximum Off State Current 0 8mA Maximum Input Impedance 48 67kQ 146V de Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 2ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 6ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of state Software configurable
39. I O module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Multiple Output Point Densities ControlLogix diagnostic output modules use either 8 or 16 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 23 Fusing Diagnostic digital outputs have internal electronics to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or through ladder logic running on a controller For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse see page 6 19 mT Electronic fuses are also reset through a software reset or when the diagnostic output module is power cycled Table 4 11 Recommended Fuses Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse Type AC 1756 OAgD 2 Yes Fused on a per Electronically fused point basis DC 1756 0B16D 2 3 Yes Fused on a per Electronically fused point basis 1 Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a shor
40. IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when produc is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Eq
41. L T 3 This wiring example shows a ru I ie nee single voltage source IN 13 Wal T IN 12 Group 1 4 If separate power sources D are used do not exceed the TT TA oe f IN 1 IN 14 specified isolation voltage LS Ip Daisy chain to 2 1 HY 7 12 1 other RTBs ie D L 40180 M Simplified schematic LED indicator IN 0 5V C D VVV e A i AC INPUT al gt L2 0 Ware 3 bd DS CD R Z ST012345670 s ST 8 9 101112131415 K GND gt l 8 Control Bus Display Interface 30339 M 20941 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 1756 IN16 Specifications Module Specific Information 7 39 Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 56W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 1W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 30V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 24V ac On State Current 5mA 10V ac 60Hz minimum 25mA 30V ac 60Hz maximum 30V ac Maximum Off State Voltage 5V Maximum Off State Current 2 75mA Maximum Input Impedance 2 5kQ 60Hz Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 10ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 10ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Sms or 18ms Diagnostic Fun
42. Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the controller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Producer Consumer Model By using the Producer Consumer model ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without having been polled by a controller first The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example an input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another processor For a more detailed explanation of this process see page 2 19 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 10 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Status Indicator Information Each ControlLogix digital I O module has an LED status indicator on the front of the module that allows you to check the module health and operational status of a module The LED displays vary for each module Table 3 5 describes what status each LED indicator represents Table 3 5 Status Description 1 0 status This yellow display indicates the ON OFF state of the field device ST LEDs For the 1756 0A8D and 1756 0A8E modules IMPORTANT the I O status indicato
43. Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 700us 2ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of State Time Stamp of Inputs Software configurable 200us Short Inrush Current 250mA peak decaying to lt 37 in 22ms without activation Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque NEMA clamp 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 16 Module Specific Information Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packa
44. Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient Immunity EC 61000 4 5 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Enclosure Type Rating None open style Conducted RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Co
45. RSLogix 5000 software monitors this data area to annunciate the modules failures Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 7 Rack Connections When a digital I O module is located in a remote chassis with respect to its owner you may select rack optimization or listen only rack optimization in the Communications Format field during initial module configuration This depends on the bridge module 1756 CNB configuration If the CNB is selected for Listen Only rack option then the I O module only allows the Listen Only rack option A rack connection economizes connection usage between the owner controller and digital I O in the remote chassis Rather than having several direct connections with individual RPI values the owner controller has a single rack connection with a single RPI value That RPI value accommodates all digital I O modules in the rack connection IMPORTANT Because rack connections are only applicable in applications that use a remote chassis you must configure the Communications Format for both the remote I O module and the remote 1756 CNB module Make sure you configure both modules for Rack Optimization If you choose a different Communications Format for each the controller makes two connections to the same chassis one for each format and the same data travels across ControlNet If you use Rack Optimization for both modules you
46. Total backplane power 1 11W Maximum Power Dissipation Module 3 3W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 11 25 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 90 146V de Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V de 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF 2ms maximum 2ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM will protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Soft
47. Usage tips 3 8 4 8 Used with timestamping 3 8 4 8 Used with timestamping in ladder logic software configuration tags A 1 Specifications 1756 IA16 module 7 3 7 9 1756 IA16 module 7 6 1756 IA8D module 7 12 1756 IB16 module 7 15 1756 IB16D module 7 18 1756 IB16 module 7 21 1756 IB32 module 7 24 7 45 1756 IC16 module 7 27 1756 IH161 module 7 33 1756 IM16 module 7 36 1756 IN16 module 7 39 1756 IV16 module 7 42 1756 0A16 module 7 48 1756 0A16l module 7 51 1756 OA8 module 7 54 1756 OA8D module 7 57 1756 OA8E module 7 60 1756 OB16D module 7 63 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Index 6 1756 OB16E module 7 66 7 87 7 96 1756 0B16I module 7 69 7 72 1756 0B32 module 7 75 7 99 1756 OB8 module 7 78 1756 OB8EI module 7 81 1756 008 module 7 84 1756 OH8 module 7 90 1756 ON8 module 7 93 1756 OV16E module 7 96 1756 OW16l module 7 102 1756 OX8I module 7 105 specifications 1756 IV16 module 7 30 1756 0G16 module 7 87 Spring Clamp RTB 5 7 Standard Depth Housing 5 9 Status Indicators Input modules 8 2 Output modules 8 3 status indicators 1 4 Status Reporting Diagnostic input modules 4 29 Diagnostic output modules 4 31 Standard input modules 3 21 Standard output modules 3 22 System Time Adjusting the RPI 6 9 Choosing a timestamped input communications format 6 6 Choosing a timestamped output communications format 6 7 Diagnostic timestamp 4 11 Schedule outputs 3 8 4 7 Timestamping inputs
48. Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of a ControlLogix digital 1 0 module 2 In additon to standard ControlLogix power supplies ControlLogix Redundant Power Supplies are also available for your application For more information on these supplies see the ControlLogix Selection Guide publication 1756 SG001 or contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 3 Table 1 3 Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Catalog Description Module Specific Number Information on 1756 IV32 10 31V de 32 point sourcing current input page 7 44 module 1756 0A16 74 265V ac 16 point output module page 7 47 1756 0A16l 74 265V ac 16 point isolated output module page 7 50 1756 0A8 74 265V ac 16 point output module page 7 53 1756 OA8D 74 132V ac 8 point diagnostic output module page 7 56 1756 OA8E 74 132V ac 8 point e fused output module page 7 59 1756 0B16D 19 30V dc 16 point diagnostic output module page 7 62 1756 OB16E 10 31V dc 16 point e fused output module page 7 65 1756 0B16l 10 30V dc 16 point isolated output module page 7 68 1756 OB16IS 10 30V de scheduled module page 7 71 1756 0B32 10 31V dc 32 point output module page 7 74 1756 0B8 10 30V dc 8 point output module page 7 77 1756 OB8EI 10 30V dc 8 point e fused isolated output page 7 80 module 1756 0C8 30
49. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid a hazard e recognize the consequence THA WAN Labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present TETA Labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be dangerous temperatures Summary of Changes Introduction This release of this document contains updated information Changes are designated by change bars in margin as shown to the right New and Revised ee E lists new m ee included in this release of the ControlLogix digital I O mo
50. continuous voltage between groups 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 4 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 13 Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2
51. one open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class D E ivision 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations uropean Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions cE Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category info installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other 1756 OW 161 NOTES 1 Display Control Bus Interface marked L1 15 wires to a single chain as shown is 8A isolation voltage PS Module features Module Specific Information 7 101 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description
52. preserve bandwidth and configure your system to operate more efficiently The input or data echo information is limited to general faults and data No additional status e g diagnostic is available IMPORTANT Each controller can only establish 250 connections in any combination of direct or rack In other words you can use a rack connection between an owner controller and multiple remote I O modules while simultaneously using a direct connection between that same controller and any other I O modules in the same remote chassis Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 8 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System A Owner controller Local chassis In Figure 2 3 the owner controller is communicating with all I O modules in the remote chassis but has used only one connection The data from all three modules is sent together simultaneously at the RPI This option eliminates the need for three separate connections Figure 2 3 Using a Rack Connection with I 0 in a Remote Chassis Remote chassis A Net Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module E COON Duu H o o 4
53. program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A m this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation Enable field power loss detection as shown below E Module Properties Local 1756 IA8D 2 1 Diagnostics Backplane General Connection Module Inf Enable Input Filter Time Diag I s m M M M M M M M M M M M wr M M M M M M M M M M IV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status One Site Ee ee Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 20 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Using Features Specific to The features described in this section are all available on all Diagnostic Output Modules ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Configurable Point Level Output Fault States Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states either ON OFF or HOLD in case of a communications failure or program mode ee ov henever you inhibit a diagnostic output module it enters the program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs turn off during program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will turn off Set output fault state as shown belo
54. to make the module identification information more easily understood The user defined data structure appears below Controller Tags who controller Iof x Scope wholcontraler 7 Show Show All z Sot Tag Name v Local 3 C Winey Hon AB 1756_DI C 0 Local 3 1 aa A AB 1756_D1 1 0 RPN ees WHO_Informatior WHO vendor 16 0001 Hex INT WHO product_type 7 Decimal INT WHO product_code 2 Decimal INT Switiomaprevisiorr 2 Decimal SINT WHO minor_revision 5 Decimal SINT WHO status 2 0000_0000_C Binary INT WHO serialnumber 16 c000_Obaf Hex DINT WHO string_length 32 Decimal SINT WHO ascii_string Leah SERN Hex SINT 32 WHO_Information Weak EE Hex SINT 48 ETH MESSAGE FHEAE EE who_msg Monitor Tags Edt Tags Tags 4 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 B 14 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Rung 0 constantly polls the module for WHO status To conserve bandwidth only poll for status when necessary Rung 1 extracts the product type and catalog code Rung 2 extracts the module s major and minor revisions Rung 3 extracts the module s status information Rung 4 extracts the vendor ID and serial number Rung 5 extracts the module s ASCII text strin
55. 1 0 Module Features This chapter describes devices compatible with ControlLogix I O and features that are specific to various modules Table 3 1 For information about See page Determining Output Module Compatibility 3 2 Features on ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Modules 3 3 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Modules 3 4 Using Features Specific to Standard Input Modules 3 11 Using Features Specific to Standard Output Modules 3 13 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers 3 21 3 22 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controller ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether they are ON or OFF ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON OFF signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Typical input devices include e proximity switches e limit switches e selector switches e float switches e pushbutton switches Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 2 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules you must consider e the voltage necessary for your application e whether you need a solid state device e current leakage e if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring For more information on compatibility of other Rockwell Automation products to ControlLogix
56. 1756 IA8D module 4 18 1756 OA8E module 3 18 Field Power Loss Word Diagnostic input modules 4 29 4 30 Diagnostic output modules 4 31 4 32 Standard output modules 3 22 3 23 Filter Times Software configurable 3 12 4 15 FM Certification 3 10 4 10 FM certification 1 1 Full Diagnostic Output Data Communications Format 6 7 Full Diagnostic Input Data Communications Format 6 6 Full Diagnostics Scheduled Output Data Communications Format 6 7 Fuse Blown Word Diagnostic output modules 4 31 4 32 Standard output modules 3 22 3 23 Fusing Diagnostic output modules 4 22 4 26 Nondiagnostic output modules 3 15 Recommended fuses for diagnostic output modules 4 22 Recommended fuses for standard output modules 3 16 Resetting a fuse in ladder logic B 12 Resetting electronic fuse in RSLogix 5000 6 19 H Housing Choosing the extended depth housing 5 9 Inhibit Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 9 Preventing communication Glossary 2 Input Module Filters Configuring in RSLogix 5000 3 12 4 15 6 10 6 12 Input Online Services 6 18 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 1 Interface Module IFM Glossary 2 interface module IFM 1 2 Internal Module Operations 2 4 J Jumper Bar 5 7 Using with 1756 IA161 module 7 5 Using with the 1756 IB16 module 7 20 Using with the 1756 IH16I module 7 32 Using with the 1756 IM161 module 7 35 Using with the 1756 0A16 module 7 50 Using with the 1756 0B16 module 7 68 7 71 Using with the 1756 OW16l module
57. 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when produc is marked UL
58. 2 14 Test Na U Shock 40 0 85 C 40 to 185 F packaged Non operati n packaged Non opera packaged Non operating Dry Heat ng Cold ing Thermal Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non opera 5 to 95 non condensing ing Damp Heat Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity EC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power p 4kV at 2 5 orts Hz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Ap
59. 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Oscillatory Surge IEEE C37 90 1 Withstand 4kV Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n Zone 2 Maximum wir
60. 50mA Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Diagnostic Functions Fuse Blown 1 Fuse and indicator group Time stamp of Ims diagnostics Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 60V peak Fusing Mechanically fused group 3 15A 250V ac slow blow Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 1500A interruption current Littelfuse p n H2153 15 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 4 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 49 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad
61. 60V dc 8 point output module page 7 83 1756 0G16 TTL output module page 7 86 1756 OH8I 90 146V dc 8 point isolated output module page 7 89 1756 ON8 10 30V ac 8 point output module page 7 92 1756 OV16E 10 31V de 16 point e fused sinking current page 7 95 output module 1756 OV32E 10 31V de 32 point electronically fused sinking page 7 98 current output module 1756 0W16l 10 265V 16 point isolated relay output module page 7 101 1756 0X8I 10 265V 5 150V dc 8 point isolated relay page 7 104 normally open normally closed output module Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Physical Features of the ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules bac Figure 1 1 ControlLogix 1 0 Module ie DC OUTPUT 3 f ta Status st 01234567 E Locking tab indicators 6 Removable Terminal Block mi J arp t o ld el o o mel e e 8 Toprand Connector pins Jg p H botto p a guides 7 Slots for 1S pi ControlLogix F keying the plane Oy ate qd nector o g O o qd LL e oo NA _ j 40200 M Table 1 4 Physical Features on the ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Physical Feature Description Co
62. 7 What This Chapter Contains n naaa aasa eK 7 1 756A lA e er eap aaa Se Bias aTa E ai 7 2 17560 TATO sesi eccctt vas iets an BE EE O wee eee ek 7 5 DI DOTAG2 fake Sachi bo a o Hid Ani Beh Pe kane IS ae he 7 8 TISGANCDS 24s beast 8 eS SE RSs oe EEG E FOSTERS ES 7 11 iS Adc Co ae oe oer cee re ee ree ee Cee eee ee 7 14 TE7SOABIODS iau ru Da dtue tented seal Sie baal eee he 7 17 TSO BLOl 5 coe Ulex foe Su ES DoS GE DAG Bos BEES oes 7 20 1736 B32B shoe pe i nae a amp Bach Ad wh eA YE A ROS 7 23 17560 NON se oo AM DG eS tie Be BORIS Ra Sale dois Clad 7 26 1750 NG LO ern x rare ahah rat E eae we hee ane 7 29 LZ SO AIO r niran amp hg Mittens bel Bites otha Beas 7 32 1756 IM161 Pe eS dc od SR e s Re ah eSB OEE ee 7 35 Ae PGA AG ork seni ie et a So I te a A Aas eae nts St se 7 38 1750 IV 1G dan ashi e eae te Ble tated E ted ee Ra a 7 41 1730 IV A a a ee 7 44 ETSO OANG 6 os Sev hig netted a ele ghee tle a e Ate Ltd abe done Coke 7 47 i ras c Ft GI e Cremer ere eran year we cern ae re rere eee 7 50 T75G20NG oe tos pina te se ete hpa ANE hose oP eee Ges 7 53 1750 OA8 Di tick gee ie Get wad Wie es geet eG Peet aare Oct 7 56 175G OAGH tx ins ead ah i eis eats 7 59 1756 OBIOL 1 4 4 Uleks Coulee 223 ek een Sexe een 7 62 1756 OB16E 4 Ss 2th Bead ae eds eat RR eS oe es 7 65 T750 OB OL 435 Deh tue Yo abia a de ae aa Senet as 7 68 1750 OBTGIS oes Warde aay ata Be RAE Oe Ee ee 7 71 1756 2OB 52 pn ehorn ab ote dis were aban Reed amp
63. 7 101 Using with the 1756 OX8I module 7 104 K Keying 5 3 Electronic 3 5 4 5 keying mechanical keying 1 4 L Ladder Logic Creating new tag B 3 Message configuration B 4 message instruction B 3 Message instructions B 1 Module services B 2 Performing the pulse test B 12 Resetting a fuse B 12 Resetting latched diagnostics B 12 Latched Diagnostics resetting with ladder logic B 12 Latching Diagnostic latching 3 19 4 10 Leakage Resistor Index 3 Determining on 1756 IA8D module 7 11 7 17 LED Status Indicators 3 10 4 9 Input modules 8 1 Output modules 8 3 Listen Only Communications Formats Input modules 6 6 Output modules 6 7 Listen Only Connections 2 18 Glossary 2 Listen Only Rack Connection 2 7 Listen Only Rack Optimization 2 7 Local Chassis Using input modules 2 10 Using output modules 2 15 Logix5550 Controller 2 2 Loss of Field Power 3 14 4 20 Loss of Field Power Detection Diagnostic output modules 4 28 M Major Revision 6 3 Glossary 2 Considerations for timestamping 3 9 4 8 major revision 3 5 4 5 Marking Diagnostic Data Changes 4 11 mechanical keying 1 4 Message Instructions In ladder logic B 1 Minor Revision 6 3 Glossary 3 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5 minor revision 3 5 4 5 Module Compatibility Diagnostic input modules 4 1 Diagnostic output modules 4 2 Nondiagnostic input modules 3 1 Nondiagnostic output modules 3 2 Module Fault Word Diagnostic input modules 4 29 4 30 Diagnostic output modu
64. 8 y 0 10ms 30347 M Time 40849 M 40466 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 84 Module Specific Information 1756 0C8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 165mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 89W Maximum Power Dissipation Module 4 9W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 16 71 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 30 60V de Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V de 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Tim OFF to O ON to OFF Zo 1ms maximum 2ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM will protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product R
65. C Output point current can drive 2A 033ma X 10 C 2A 0 33A 1 67A 50 C Above 30 C output point derates to 033mA C point derating The 1756 0A16l output point current 1 67A can drive the motor starter 0 375A 50 C ee Confirm the 1756 0A161 A total module current can drive 12 size 3 motor starters 50 C Motor starter steady state current X 11 motor starters 375 X 12 4 5A 50 C The output total module current can drive 5A 033ma X 10xC 5A 0 33A 4 67A 50 C Above 30 C total output current derates to 033mA xC Module derating The 1756 0A16l total output current 4 67A can drive the 12 motor starters 4 54 50 C Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 D 4 Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Hardware Response Times Appendix E Table E 1 lists the nominal hardware response times for some ControlLogix dc I O modules Times are listed for these modules because they are most likely to be used in applications that use tasks such as Events tasks where estimating module throughput time is critical Table E 1 Nominal response time in microseconds us Catalog at ane number OFF to ON ON to OFF OFF to ON ON to OFF 1756 1B16 290 640 290 700 1756 IB16D 335 675 335 740 1756 IB32 B 365 400 380 420 1756 1G16 270 365 27
66. Check this point this point at the controller Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 8 2 Troubleshooting Your Module The status indicators shown in Figure 8 1 are used on input modules Figure 8 1 1756 IA8D AC INPUT 1 0 State t st 01234567 go 1 0 Fault 1756 IB16D 7 DC INPUT ST 01234567 FLT 01234567 0 ST 8 9 10 111213 1415 FLT 8 9 10111213 1415 DIAGNOSTIC Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 AFT 01234567 K DIAGNOSTIC 8 O 6 1756 1B32 IV32 DC INPUT ST 01234567 111111 ST 89 01 gt ON ON N Dw NN A Module Status 1756 1B16 IB161 1C16 1G16 1H16l IV16 DC INPUT T 01234567 0 ST 89 101112131415 K 1756 1A16 1A161 IM16l IN16 AC INPUT T01234567 0 ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K 3 O 20945 Troubleshooting Your Module Status Indicators for Output Modules Table 8 3 Status Indicators for Output Modules 8 3 LED indicators This display Means Take this action OK Steady green The outputs are actively being None light controlled by a system processor OK Flashing green The module has passed None light internal diagnostics but is not actively controlled or it is inhibited OK Fl
67. Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 3 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 11 1756 IA8D Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF Sms Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 11 Open Wire Detection Enabled 4 17 Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 4 19 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Enabled 4 18 Modules Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 4 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected togethe
68. Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n ipment ions in Class Division 2 Group ndustrial Requirements nity ssions 1 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Use this conductor category info Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 86 Module Specific Information 1756 0616 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 Output data Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 29 Wiring Diagram for Applications that Do Not Wiring Diagram for CE Compliant and High Require CE Compliance Noise Applicationsg DC gt F DC power wire T A PA O um I ED our o 4 2 OI our o _ jil jil 7 bi ssva t C T E our 0e i al KE our 2 H H Wde te 5 L ou
69. During the I O configuration process you can specify one of several Listen modes in the Communication Format field For more information on Communications Format see page 6 6 Choosing a Listen mode option allows the controller and module to establish communications without the controller sending any configuration data In this instance another controller owns the module being listened to IMPORTANT In the Listen Only mode controllers will continue to receive data multicast from the I O module as long as the connection between the owner controller and I O module is maintained If the connection between owner controller and module is broken the module stops multicasting data and connections to all Listening controllers are also broken Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 19 Multiple Owners Because Listening controllers lose their connections to modules when communications with the owner controller stop the of Input Modules ll ControlLogix system will allow you to define more than one owner controller for input modules IMPORTANT Only input modules can have multiple owners If multiple owners are connected to the same input module they must maintain identical conf
70. Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of state Time stamp on inputs Software configurable 200us Short Inrush Current 250mA peak decaying to lt 37 in 22ms without activation Cyclic Update Time User selectable 1001s minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 25 Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14
71. H H E l 0 l H HN U N H Rack connection for a T p T P 0 in remote chassis Q U P U O 9 T U T A el T L ControlNet 41021 eTe Rack connections are only available to digital I O modules Although analog modules can only use direct connections the system can make both direct and rack connections to the same chassis Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage We recommend that you use a rack connection for applications in which e standard digital I O modules are used e non fused digital output modules are used e your owner controller is running low on connections IMPORTANT Do not use a rack connection for diagnostic I O modules or fused output modules Diagnostic and fused output data will not be transferred over a rack connection This defeats the purpose of using those modules Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 9 Input Module Operation Table 2 2 lists the differences between connection types and the advantages disadvantages of each Table 2 2 Differences Between Direct and Rack Connections Connection Type Advantages Disadvantages Direct connections All input and data echo With more data transferring information is transferred over the network your including diagnostic system does not operate as information and fusing data efficiently as with rack connections Rack connections Connection usage is Input and
72. Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Oscillatory Surge IEEE C37 90 1 Withstand 3kV Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product is
73. Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C TickAustralian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection ny TT Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Use this conductor category info mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 98 Module Specific Information 1756 0V32E Configurable Features The fo
74. Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 0 disable 1 enable NoLoadEn 1 bit per point Configuration No Load Enables No Load diagnostic 0 disable 1 enable OutputVerifyEn 1 bit per point Configuration Output Verify Enables Output Verify diagnostic 0 disable 1 enable Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 FieldPwrLoss will stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until Tag Definitions A 9 Table A 8 Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor ProgMode 1 bit per point ProgValue 1 bit per point Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Configuration Definition Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode See ProgMode 0 Off 1 On ProgToFaultEn 1 byte per module Configuration Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transitioning of outputs to FaultMode if a communications failure occurs in Program Mode Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramMode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode FaultValue 0 outputs stay in ProgramMode if comm failure 1 outputs got to Fau
75. Module Identification Description Product Type Module s product type such as Digital 1 0 or Analog 1 0 module Product Code Module s catalog number Major Revision Module s major revision number Minor Revision Module s minor revision number Status Module s status Returns the following information e Controller ownership if any e Whether module has been configured e Device Specific Status such as e Self Test e Flash update in progress e Communications fault e Not owned outputs in prog mode e Internal fault need flash update e Run mode e Program mode output mods only e Minor recoverable fault e Minor unrecoverable fault e Major recoverable fault e Major unrecoverable fault Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor for example Allen Bradley Serial Number Module serial number Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module s text string ASCII Text String Module s ASCII text string description IMPORTANT You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this information For more information on how to retrieve module identification information see Appendix B Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 1 6 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Preventing Electrostatic Discharge ATTENTION This module is sensitive to electrostatic discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affec
76. OFF and the fault appears in the OFF state until the point is reset During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to L2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to L2 as a possible cause Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 14 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Table 4 8 lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OB16D module Table 4 8 1756 0B16D Diagnostic Fault Table Ladder Commands the Output to be ON Ladder Commands the Output to be OFF Possible Cause of Fault 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the Output is shorted to GND output as OFF output as OFF 2 Fuse Blown bit is set 2 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the One of the following output as ON output as OFF 1 No Load 2 Pulse Test fails 2 No Load bit is set 2 Output shorted to DC 3 Pulse Test passes 3 No power at module 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state ofthe Hardware point damage output as ON output as OFF 2 Output Verify sets a bit 2 Pulse Test fails 1 2 3 4 5 6 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the
77. OTE rung which controls the output point based upon the input point The only difference is that the output module is configured for Scheduled Outputs The outputs will not get applied until the scheduled time has occurred The following screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder logic as they appear in the tag editor Controller Tags csti controller OF x featicortole E Shaw Show AT Sot Tag Nene E P tagName fins For Base Tag Type Style Description J we CT E S C DiC ce a a e ecm L Freins O O o oe e DIN Dec Fr Oe S A E a mn S S e mea S S e men S O e E Time at which Inout ChergedL0_ Locat0 LCSTTimestamel0 Locat0LC DINT Decm I Time at wich Inout Changed 1 Locat0 LCSTTimestamolt Locat0IC DINT Decin I Tine wich Output Wil Chenge Locat1 0 CSTTmestampl0 Locat1 0 DINT Decm m a a a a E COTE O Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 B 12 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Resetting a Fuse Performing the Pulse Test and Resetting Latched Diagnostics The following ladder logic program shows how to use ladder logic to reset the electronic fuse of a faulted point and perform a pulse test Rungs 0 and 1 are usedto 9 gt perform a reset fuse service on Bits 0 and 1 respectively of a 1756 0A8D module in slot 4 a Rung 2 performs a pulse test service to slot 4 Rung 3 moves the results o
78. October 2004 7 6 Module Specific Information 1756 IA161 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 125mA 5 1V de amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 71W Maximum Power Dissipation 4 9 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 16 71 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 79 132V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac On State Current 5mA 79V ac 47 63Hz minimum 15mA 132 V ac 47 63Hz maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 20V ac Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 8 8KQ 60Hz 132V ac Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 10ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 8ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of state Timestamp of inputs Software configurable 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100s minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keyi
79. Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Chapter 2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes how digital I O modules work in the ControlLogix system Table 2 1 For information about See page Ownership 2 2 Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 2 2 Internal Module Operations 2 4 Direct Connections 2 6 Rack Connections 2 7 Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage 2 8 Input Module Operation 2 9 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 2 10 Requested Packet Interval RPI 2 10 Change of State COS 2 10 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 2 12 Output Module Operation 2 14 Output Modules in a Local Chassis 2 15 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 2 15 Listen Only Mode 2 18 Multiple Owners of Input Modules 2 19 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners 2 20 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 2 Digital O Operation in the ControlLogix System Ownership Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Every I O module in the ControlLogix system must be owned by a Logix5000 controller This owner controller e stores configuration data for every module that it owns e can be local or remote in regard to the I O module s position e sends the I O module configuration data to define the module s behavior and begin operation with the control system Each ControlLogix I O module must con
80. Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection m Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 29 1756 IG16 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of
81. Scheduled output data communication formats Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 6 8 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Electronic Keying Electronic keying allows the ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the various slots of a configured system During module configuration you must choose one of the following keying options for your I O module e Exact Match e Compatible Module e Disable Keying For more information on electronic keying see page 3 5 Using the Default If you use the default configuration and click on Finish you are done Configuration Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 9 Altering the Default Configuration On this screen you can A Change the RPI For more information on the RPI see page 2 10 B Inhibit the module For more information jeef Inhibit Module on inhibiting the module see page 3 7 C Make sure a Major Fault occurs on the module s owner controller if there is a connection failure between the module and the controller Click Next until you see additional configuration screens On this screen you can A Enable COS for individual points Enable Open Wire detection for individual points Enable Diagnostic Latching for individual points Enable COS for diagnostic transitions This feature can only be set on a mo
82. Specific Information 7 73 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature Shock IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity Damp Heat 5 to 95 non EC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating condensing Vibration EC60068 2 6 Test Fe Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80MHz to 2000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified P
83. Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European
84. The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse was either blown or reset CST timestamped fuse data output data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse was either blown or reset This choice has the same definition as CST timestamped fuse data output data except that it is a listen only connection CST timestamped fuse data scheduled output data Listen only CST timestamped fuse data output data 1756 0A16 OA8E OB16E OB8EI OV16E OV32E The owner controller sends the module only output data The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Full diagnostic output data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Full diagnostics scheduled output data This choice has the same definition as Ful diagnostics output data except that it is a listen only connection The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Listen only full diagnostics output data Scheduled output data per point 1756 OA8D 0B16D 1756 OB16IS only 1 The 1756 O0B16IS module does not support the Rack optimization Listen only rack optimization and
85. Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions EEx 4 European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n Zone 2 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 Use this conductor category info mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 4 See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 26 Module Specific Information 1756 1016 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 9 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example DC COM can
86. Voltage 5V dc 1 5mA Recommended Values DC COM pore Power Supply Voltage Ri eax 1 2W 5 12V dc 5 5 23kQ 24V de 10 14 3kQ Simplified schematic Input 5V LED indicator ae D Control Bus DC INPUT VV T t 1 J Interface Display 3 T Yo ST 01234567 FLIT01234567 0 j t aa sTagnne is O GND O i F Y K FLT 8 9 1011121331415 C 2 d oT lt GND DIAGNOSTIC 40203 M Open wire Pod 30346 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 18 Module Specific Information 1756 IB16D Specifications Number of Inputs 16 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 150mA 5 1V de amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 84W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 gw 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 9 78 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 0 30V de Nominal Input Voltage 24V de On State Current 2mA 10V de minimum 13mA 30V de maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 5V de Minimum Off State Current 1 5mA per point Maximum Input Impedance 2 31kQ 30V de Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 335us nominal 1ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 740us 4ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Open wire Time stamp of diagnostics Change of state Ti
87. a loss of a load from a point on the module It s tag name is NoLoad For more information on no load conditions see page 4 24 Output Verify This word indicates when an output is not performing as commanded Word by the owner controller It s tag name is OutputVerify For more information on output verify see page 4 25 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because the module is an 8 point module only the first 8 bits bits 0 7 are used in the Module Fault Word Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Fault Word Fuse Blown Word Field Power Loss Word 1756 OA8D only No Load Word Output Verify Word ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 33 Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word Field Power Loss Word No Load Word and Output Verify Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things as indicated in Table 4 17 Table 4 17 This condition Communications fault Set these bits All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Field power loss No load Output verify Only the bit s affected is set to 1 Figure 4 3 provides an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogi
88. and 1756 OA8E only Module will not turn ON output if no AC power is detected Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 15 Field Wiring Options As with input modules ControlLogix output modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix I O modules provide non isolated field side wiring options each I O module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Multiple Output Point Densities ControlLogix output modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Fusing Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage Other modules require external fusing Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or through ladder logic running on a controller For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse see page 6 19 ma Electronic fuses are also reset through a software reset or when the output module is power cycled Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 16 C
89. catalog poe Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 0B32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 XIMF 2l Expander with eight feed 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20D24 LED indicating Standard with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40D24 2 24V ac dc LEDs and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F 2 Fusible Extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIMF F120 2 Fusible expander with eight 24V dc 1492 CABLExX x cable length channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM4024 8R Relay 40 pin master with eight 24V dc 1492 CABLExZ x cable length relays 1492 IXM40120 16R 40 pin master with sixteen 24V dc relays 1756 0B8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 1492 CABLExW x cable length 4 terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 OB8El 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 1492 IFM40F FS24 2
90. change in the diagnostics for a particular output point occurs Unlike diagnostic input modules this feature cannot be disabled for diagnostic output modules If any of the three events described above occurs the output module sends new data to the owner controller ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault status data to any owner listening controllers All diagnostic input modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page Table 4 14 lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic input module Table 4 14 Tag Module Fault Word Description This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules Field Power Loss Word This word indicates loss of field power to a group on the module It s tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is available on 1756 IA8D only For more information on field power loss see page 4 19 Open Wire Word Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 This word indicates the loss of a wire from a point on the module It s tag name is OpenWire For more information on open wire see page 4 17 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 31 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits app
91. conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultMode 0 OFF 1 0N Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State ProgValue 1 bit per point Configuration Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode See ProgMode 0 Off 1 On ProgToFaultEn 1 byte per module Configuration Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transitioning of outputs to FaultMode if a communications failure occurs in Program Mode Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramMode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode FaultValue 0 outputs stay in ProgramMode if comm failure 1 outputs got to FaultMode if comm failure Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 A 4 Tag Definitions Input Data Tags Table A 4 Standard Output Module Input Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or I 0 Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input data 8 bytes includin
92. control is improved from the motion coarse update rate typically 1 32ms to 100us You can also use the second 8 outputs on the 1756 OB16IS module with the MAOC instruction However only the first 8 outputs have 100us resolution The second 8 outputs are updated at the motion coarse update rate Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers Module Fault Word All modules ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 21 ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault status data to any owner listening controllers All input modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some output modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page Table 3 8 lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard input module Table 3 8 Tag Description Module Fault This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This Word word is available on all digital input modules All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits bits 0 15 are used in the Module Fault Word Table 3 9 This condition Set these bits All 32 bits are se
93. controller s tasks In addition the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes slightly with respect to getting data from the owner controller Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 16 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Remote Output Modules Connected Via ControlNet When an RPI value is specified for an output module in a remote chassis connected to the owner controller by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the owner controller to multicast the output data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI but the control system will guarantee that the output module will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI Figure 2 7 Output Module in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At Least as Often as RPI A A a A Owner controller ControlNet Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module Output module oO OOO 42 a a 1 JAME Ocg DGS ooo Data sent from owner controller at
94. defined during configuration and maintained by a real time connection Therefore the module processes messaging services only after the needs of the I O connection have been met For example you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the module but real time control of your process is still occurring using the input value from that same channel Because the input value is critical to your application the module prioritizes the sampling of inputs ahead of the unlatch service request This prioritization allows input channels to be sampled at the same frequency and the process alarms to be unlatched in the time between sampling and producing the real time input data One Service Performed Per Instruction Message instructions will only cause a module service to be performed once per execution For example if a message instruction sends a service to the module to unlatch the high high alarm on a particular channel that channel s high high alarm will unlatch but may be set on a subsequent channel sample The message instruction must then be reexecuted to unlatch the alarm a second time Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration B 3 Creating a New Tag This ladder logic is written in the Main Routine section of RSLogix 5000 ff RSLogix 5000 Digital_10 1756 Ele Edit View Search Logic Corn alsa a e lt Offline D RUN NoFor
95. dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at fault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void if any anomalies such as distorted aximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 50 Module Specific Information 1756 OA161 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example L1 can be connected to either terminal marked L1 15 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you use the second L1 15 terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain as shown The jumper bar part number is 97739201 Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales representative to order additional jumper bars if necessary If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic lt Control Bus Interface Display Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the featur
96. each module Table 4 5 describes what status each LED indicators represents Table 4 5 Status Description 1 0 status This yellow display indicates the ON OFF state of the field device For the 1756 OA8D and 1756 OA8E modules STLEDs IMPORTANT the I O status indicator does not illuminate without field power applied Module status This green display indicates the module s communication status OK LED Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the presence or absence of various faults FLT LEDs Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and indicates the state of the module s fuse FUSE LED For examples of status indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules see Chapter 8 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 11 Full Class I Division 2 Compliance All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2 system certification This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in an environment other than only a 100 hazard free IMPORTANT Modules should not be pulled under power nor should a powered RTB be removed in a Class I Division 2 environment UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV Agency Approvals Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV agency approval are marked as such Ultimately all digital mo
97. in the top and bottom locking tabs from the Chassis Locking tabs od a er 2 Pull module out of the chassis gy ase W Bee SEN S N ANN EDN Ss 2 EAN S S8el 5j il j Chapter Summary and In this chapter you read about What s Next e installing the module e keying the removable terminal block and the interface module e connecting wiring e assembling the removable terminal block and the housing e installing the removable terminal block or interface module onto the module e removing the removable terminal block from the module e removing the module from the chassis Chapter 6 explains Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Chapter 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes why you must configure your ControlLogix digital I O modules and how to configure them for use in the ControlLogix system Table 6 1 Configuring Your 1 0 Module 6 1 Overview of the Configuration Process 6 2 Creating a New Module 6 4 Using the Default Configuration 6 8 Altering the Default Configuration 6 9 Configuring a Standard Output Module 6 11 Configuring a Diagnostic Input Module 6 12 Configuring a Diagnostic Output Module 6 13 Editing Configuration 6 14 Co
98. input modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG SO001 Determining Output ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output Al devices Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix Module Compatibility a e motor starters e solenoids e indicators When designing a system e make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation e make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads check the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device The ControlLogix standard digital outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix standard digital inputs The exceptions are the ac and dc diagnostic input modules When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information specifically on the compatibility of motor starters to ControlLogix output modules see Appendix D For more information on compatibility of other Rockwell Automation products to ControlLogix output modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG SO001 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Features on ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Modules Table 3 2 This feature Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Fe
99. it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at fault Be sure the waveform is a good Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 56 Module Specific Information 1756 OA8D Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 1 No Load Detection Enabled 4 24 Field Side Output Verification Enabled 4 25 Pulse Test Performed at user s request 4 26 Field P
100. module from short circuit conditions The principal In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after i protection is based on a thermal cutout ts thermal cutout temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V dc The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU Bridge etc What signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs The output cannot turn ON due to hardware point damage Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by his means is that the output verify fault he module and the output is turned OFF It is not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the OFF state If a short circuit occurs the point is turned OFF and the fault appears in the OFF state until that point is reset When pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to GND as a possible cause ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Featur
101. modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG SO001 ini j j ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output etermining Diagnostic F i 3 a a i evices Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix Output Module outputs include Compatibility e motor starters e solenoids e indicators When designing a system e make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation e make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads check the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the device ControlLogix diagnostic digital outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix diagnostic digital inputs When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information on the compatibility of motor starters to ControlLogix output modules see Appendix D For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix output modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG SO001 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Features on ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Modules IMPORTANT ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 3 Table 4 2 lists features on ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules The
102. not be set see page 4 13 IMPORTANT The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a load It merely indicates this condition is possible Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Click on Test to perform the Pulse Test for a point on the module ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 27 Pulse Test is a service that needs to be executed from an RSLogix 5000 program or the module properties page using the pulse test tab and should be verified with your load to make sure that there are no false transitions Perform the Pulse Test in RSLogix 5000 as shown below Your RSLogix 5000 project must be online for you to perform the pulse test E Module Properties Local 0 1756 OB16D 2 1 Ej x General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane Status Running Cancel Apply Help For an example of how to perform a Pulse Test using ladder logic see page B 12 Point Level Electronic Fusing Diagnostic output modules use electronic fusing to protect output points from the surge of too much current through that point on the module If too much current begins to flow through a point the fuse is tripped and a point level fault is sent to the controller Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or through ladder logic running on a controller This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the u
103. on an I O module Communications format Format that defines the type of information transferred between an I O module and its owner controller This format also defines the tags created for each I O module Compatible match An electronic keying protection mode that requires that the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor and catalog number In this case the minor revision of the module must greater than or equal to that of the configured slot Connection The communication mechanism from the controller to another module in the control system ControlBus The backplane used by the 1756 chassis Coordinated system time CST Timer value which is kept synchronized for all modules within a single ControlBus chassis Direct connection An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Glossary 2 Disable keying An electronic keying protection mode that requires no attributes of the physical module and the module configured in the software to match Download The process of transferring the contents of a project on the workstation into the controller Electronic keying A feature where modules can be requested to perform an electronic check to make sure that the physical module is consistent with what was configured by the software Exact match An electronic keying protection
104. per point Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V us for loads lt 50mA Output Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 60V peak Fusing Not protected Fused IFM will protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH 2 Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 16 4 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Pub
105. point on the module It s Word tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is only available on 1756 OA8E module For more information on field power loss see page 3 18 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because the module is an 8 point module only the first 8 bits bits 0 7 are used in the Module Fault Word Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word and Field Power Loss Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things as indicated in Table 3 11 Table 3 11 This condition Set these bits Communications fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Only the bit s affected is set to 1 Field power loss Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 23 Figure 3 2 offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital output modules Figure 3 2 Bit 31 Bit 0 Y Y Module Fault Word 1 1 1 All modules A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault Word A A Fuse Blown and Field Power Loss condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word
106. project The editing process begins in the RSLogix 5000 1 Access the module s configuration FE RSLogix 5000 Digital_I0 1756 L1 File Edit View Search Logic Communications RemProg J I Program Mode Faces Contos 0K NoEde l attery Neea ain 1 0 OK m B 68 Controller Digital 10 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler 6 8 Tasks DA MainTask 2 MainProgram Unscheduled Programs Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Trends Data Types Gi User Defined H E Stings E E Predefined E Module Defined B 68 1 0 Configuration f 1 1756 CNB A CNB A Right click on 1 0 Configuration ggg Gar HEX Copy Ctrl C Rase Bikes Delete Del ES Module Define Cross Reference iite a veggi Pint Coe 4 Properties The General tab of the configuration wizard appears B Click Properties 2 Click on the tab of the page that you want to view or reconfigure and make any appropriate changes Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 15 3 Make any necessary changes In the example below COS was disabled for all inputs if they changed from OFF to ON E Module Properties Local 6 1756 IB16I 1 1 Co m ooon lt l is qq 4 After you make the necessary changes click OK Before your project is updated online RSLogix 5000 verifies your desired change O
107. shown The jumper bar part number is 97739201 Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales representative to order additional jumper bars if necessary If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Simplified schematic GND 0 Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 11 C 0 o enD 0 2 19 INO o o o DC O ae GND 1 PEs step iNet mg GND 2 Hae 5 IN 2 DC 3 GND 3 le Tia INS oo o DC 3 GND 4 10 9 a IN 4 GND 5 j2 n IN 5 GND 6 a4 13 J IN 6 DC 7 GND 7 gt 46 15 IN 7 f DC 7 O GND 8 817 N 8 0 0 o Jumper bar uk in length GND 9 20 19 IN 9 GND 10 1 amp 22 21 IN 10 GND 11 Oja 200 N 11 oo Non isolated GND 12 25 25 IN 12 wiring GND 13 19l 278 IN 13 GND 14 lo 2 N 14 o o GND 15 32 31 IN 15 DC
108. the IN 5 ee ee IN 4 module For example DC can a be connected to either termina Daisy chain to IN 7 lap H IN 6 marked DC 1 other RTBs ary 2 Do not physically connect more than Dee HOE ie DC 0 two wires to a single RTB terminal f A When you daisy chain from a group Ned lap E Ne to another RTB always connect the IN 11 tap N 10 daisy chain as shown NW Bii 3 This wiring example shows a single Group 1 HOD H Group 1 IN 13 gt IN 12 voltage source nu ID 4 If separate power sources are IN 15 i ie IN 14 used do not exceed the specified E i isolation voltage J5 iG DC 1 Simplified schematic 42552 LED indicator DC INPUT 5V DC 0 j a N C IN 0 K C D TaSi A GND ControlBus Interface Display ST 01234567 0 ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K 3 20945 M 42674 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 42 Module Specific Information 1756 IV16 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 110mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 61W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 41W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 8 47 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 0 30V d
109. value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 25 M OUT 1 q joa q OUT 0 OUT 3 TQ l4 3 OUT 2 OUT 5 oe 5 OUT 4 NOTES 1 Do not physically OUT 7 a le 7 g OUT 6 ae morg A Group 0 OUT 9 ay lo 9 OUT 8 Group 0 ane Nee Wt tscel OUT 11 Jey 1 Epp OUT 10 terminal When you OUT 13 g 144 3G OUT 12 daisy chain from a Daisy chain to g 3 group to another RTB oiher RTPS eae z i a T always connect the S daisy chain as shown OUT 17 G 20 19 G OUT 16 2 This wiring example OUT 19 Q 21g OUT 18 uses a single voltage OUT 21 Qa 28 OUT 20 source eer OUT 23 l 25 OUT 22 Sec 3 If separate power roup OUT 25 Gi 28 27 OUT 24 roup sources are used do not OUT 27 30 29 OUT 26 exceed the specified OUT 29 Ee 31 OUT 28 isolation voltage OUT 31 J 33 G OUT 30 DC 1 Tq s6 35 RTN OUT 1 DC COM 40171 M Simplified schematic DC 0 4 Surge Current Chart LED indicator gt K amp N 45V J G gt DC OUTPUT FA OUT 0 T p sT 01234567 Surge 111111 9 J A RTN g ST89 012345 O 8 Continuous 11112222 KC orc ST 67890123 ControlBus Interface 8 ST A 5 2 i S 3 3 lt Display 0 30347 M Time om 40851 M 40465 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 0B32 Specifications 7 75
110. violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of these products Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 F 2 Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module Table F 1 lists the IFMs and prewired cables that can be used with ControlLogix digital I O modules Table F1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable se Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 IA16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D120 LED indicating Standard with 120V ac LEDs 1492 IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V ac LEDs 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V ac with extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20F F120A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for inputs 1756 IA161 1492 IFM40DS1 20 4 LED indicating Isolated with 120V ac LEDs and 4 1492 CABLExY x cable length terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS120A 4 Fusible Isolated with 120V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per input 1756 IA32 1756 IA8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D120 LED indicating Standard with 120V ac LEDs 1492 IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V ac LEDs 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V ac with extra termi
111. 0 12 0 1g INO o oL1 0 Isolated 2 4 adi a Ned i wiring j pe L2 20o L2 2 e 5 N 2 O O oL1 2 All terminals with the same name are L2 3 8 7k IN 3 connected together on the module L2 4o _ 9 4 lio 9 IG iai o O OL1 4 For example L2 can be connected to 12 5 Ie hacmi IN 5 any terminal marked L2 15 L2 6 14 13 GDI IN 6 Do not physically connect more than g two wires to a single RTB terminal L2 7 18 15 IN 7 When you use the second L2 15 Jumper bar Cut to length L2 8 CD 18 17 IN 8 terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs L2 9 1 20 19 IN 9 ee always connect the daisy chain to the Non isolated L2 10 Dz a IN 10 O O terminal directly connected to the wiring L2 11 Qla 23 IN 11 supply wire as shown L2 12 QZ 26 3D IN 12 The jumper bar part number is 12 13 QDI og 27 IN 13 O Oo gt 97739201 Contact your local 19 14 ID 20 29 IN 14 Rockwell Automation sales l L2 15 Ela aK IN 15 oO o representative to order additional o Dia 3d jumper bars if necessary Le 2 15 E g Not used O If separate power sources are a Not used ASe 88 Not used L1 used do not exceed the specified l isolation voltage N 30243 M Daisy chain to other RTBs Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V N 6 AC INPUT p ie ee 3 af i Me ESTER ST 012345670 MN J ST 8 9 101112131415 K GND gt Control Bus Display Interface 30338 M 20945 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P
112. 0 390 1756 IV16 280 480 280 540 1756 1V32 420 525 350 590 1756 0B16D 55 5 0 55 630 1756 OB16E 70 320 70 360 1756 0B32 45 175 55 200 1756 0G16 45 120 45 145 1756 OV16E 75 285 75 360 1756 0V32E 75 190 75 230 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 E 2 Hardware Response Times l Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Appendix F Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module As an alternative to buying RTBs and connecting the wires yourself you and can buy a wiring system of e interface modules IFMs that mount on DIN rails provide the output terminal blocks for the I O module Use the IFMs with the pre wired cables that match the I O module to the interface module For a complete list of the IFMs available for use with ControlLogix digital I O modules see Table F 1 on page F 2 I O module ready prewired cables One end of the cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I O module The other end has individually color coded conductors that connect to a standard terminal block For a complete list of the prewired cables available for use with ControlLogix digital I O modules see Table F 2 on page F 10 Figure F 1 shows the IFM and prewired cables Figu re F1 1 0 module Prewired cable IFM Te The 1492 IFMs may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM
113. 0 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level 4 See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 92 Module Specific Information 1756 ON8 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example L1 can be connected to any terminal marked L1 1 2 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown 3 This wiring example shows a single voltage source 4 f separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic lt Control Bus Interface Display Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communication
114. 004 Signal received from controller Output Modules Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 5 ControlLogix output modules receive a signal from the controller and process it internally G e ASIC delay and hardware delay before sending a signal to the output device via the RTB Figure 2 2 I I ASIC delay Hardware delay l I DA Sees a A Sg Typically 10uS Varies between i modules and i application Signal sent from configuration RTB output point 42702 As previously stated many factors e g module type voltage temperature if the module is turning ON or OFF affect the signal propogation delay on a module But a typical delay time can be estimated For example if you are turning ON a 1756 OB16E module at 24V dc in 25 C conditions the signal propogation delay is affected by e hardware delay to energize the module typically 70uS on this module e ASIC scan 10US In the best case scenario the 1756 OB16E module has a 80US signal propogation delay These times are not guaranteed We list nominal and maximum delay times for each module in Chapter 7 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 6 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Connections With respect to ControlLogix I O modules a connection is the data transfer link between a controller and an I O module There are two types of connections e Direct Connections e Rack Connecti
115. 01234567 K DIAGNOSTIC 30340 M 20927 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 IA8D Specifications Number of Inputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V de amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation 4 5W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 15 35 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 79 132V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac On State Current 74V 5mA ac 47 63Hz minimum 16mA 132V ac 47 63Hz maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 20V Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 8 25k 2 60Hz 132V ac Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Diagnostic Functions Open Wire Loss of Power Time Stamp of Diagnostics Change of State Time stamp of Inputs Hardware Delay 10ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 9ms or 18ms Off state leakage current 1 5mA minimum Transition range 46 to 85V ac 1ms Software configurable 200us Short Inrush Current Cyclic Update Time 250mA peak decaying to lt 37 in 22ms without activation User Selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac max
116. 0A16l Specifications Number of Outputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 300mA 5 1V de amp 2 5mA 24V de Total backplane power 1 60W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 5w 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 18 76 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 30 C amp 1A maximum 60 C Linear derating Per Module 5A maximum 30 C amp 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak 2A amp 6V peak load current lt 50mA Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V us for loads lt 50mA Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 60V peak Fusing Not protected Fused IFM will protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application
117. 1000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other 1756 IM16l Module features Module Specific Information 7 35 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 12 NOTES 1 All terminals wit
118. 12 You can use the Pulse Test to Description detect a blown fuse before it The Blown Fuse diagnostic see page 4 23 for a complete explanation of fusing can only be used happens when an output module is in the ON state But it would useful to be made aware when operating conditions for a module may cause a blown fuse If you perform a pulse test on the module while the output is in the OFF state the output point is commanded to be ON briefly as described above Although no diagnostic bits are set in the output data echo the pulse test will report a failure because conditions when the point is ON indicate a blown fuse condition may occur see page 4 13 IMPORTANT The Pulse Test does not guarantee a fuse will blow when the output point turns ON It merely indicates this condition is possible detect a No Load condition with The No Load diagnostic see page 4 24 for a complete explanation can only detect a fault i set an output ON the No Load bit when an output point is in the OFF state But you may find it useful to be made aware when operating conditions for that point may reveal a potential No Load condition If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the ON state the output point is commanded to be OFF briefly as described on page 4 26 The pulse test will report a failure because conditions when the point is OFF indicate the possible absence of a field device in this case though the No Load bit will
119. 15 B ie exceed the specified T i isolation voltage DC 1 Ia D DC COM 40174 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator Display Optoisolation DC 0 z 5 gt DC OUTPUT E a oO Y ne SN Surge nm A R 2A Contin d s ST01234567 8 ty i A FUSE E 0 A OUT 0 1A Lei ST 8 9 10 111213 1415 T _ FUSE U ControlBus Electronic Fuse RTN 0 10ms ELECTRONICALLY FUSED Bs OUT 0 Time Interface Circuitry 41113 M 40851 M 40464 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 OB16E Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 250mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 1 32W Maximum Power Dissipation 4 1W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 13 98 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 31 2V de Output Current Rating Per Point 1A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 2A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 3mA per output Maximum On State Voltage Drop 400mV dc 1A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Diagnostic Functions Short Trip Time stamp of diagnostics 70us nominal 1ms maximum 360us nominal 1ms maximum 1 8A 24V dc Output ON then short 4 1A 24V dc for 18ms Output ON into short
120. 1756 IG16 1756 IH161 1756 IM 161 1756 IN16 1756 IV16 1756 IV32 configurable features they support Offer these configurable features Change of State For a full description of the feature see page Input Filter Times Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Figure 6 2 shows how to configure your standard input module Figure 6 2 Module Properties Local 1756 1416 2 1 Enable Change of State a A Enable and disable COS for each point on the module e Check the box to enable COS e Clear the box to disable COS M M B Change filter times In this example you can set the filters on a channelwide basis F m lzi Cancel lt Back Next gt L Erin Help Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Configuring a Standard Output Module Table 6 5 These output modules 1756 0A16 1756 OA16 1756 0A8 1756 OA8E 1756 OB16E 1756 0B16l 1756 OB16IS 1756 0B32 1756 0B8 1756 OB8El 1756 0C8 1756 0G16 1756 OH8 1756 ON8 1756 OV32E 1756 OW16l 1756 OX81 1756 OA8E only Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Offer these configurable features Output State in Program 6 11 Table 6 5 lists the ControlLogix standard digital output modules and the configurable features they support For a full description of the feature see page Choices shown in Mode
121. 2g 20 3 This wiring example shows a single voltage source E PET 27 Group 1 4 If separate power sources are used do not exceed a the specified isolation voltage a e S Simplified schematic ele A Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 43685 LED indicator 5V 6 AC INPUT K ST 01234567 3 1111119 T ST89 012345 f gt 11112222 67890123 6 Control Bus Display gy 22 222233 45678901 Interface aig 30082 M 1756 1A32 Specifications Module Specific Information 7 9 Number of Inputs 32 16 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 165mA 5 1V de amp 2 0mA 24V de Backplane Power 0 9W Maximum Power Dissipation 6 1W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 20 8 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 74 132V ac 47 63Hz Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac Off State Voltage 20V ac maximum On State Current 5mA 74V ac minimum 15mA 132V ac maximum Off State Current 2 5mA ac maximum Input Impedance 14 0kQ 60Hz maximum Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 1 5ms nominal 10ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 1ms nominal 8ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Chan
122. 3 DC 1 a3 35 jg RTN OUT 1 DC COM 43386 M Simplified schematic DC 0 Surge Current Chart LED indicator gt K a gt DC OUTPUT FOX OUT 0 Nis t p sT 01234567 VAN RTN S qa Sue sao gi2sis o gt Q 8 Continuous 11112222 KC gt 5 ST 67890123 0 5A 60 C 22222233 ControlBus Interface ST 45678901 Display 0 i 10ms 30347 M Time 40851 M 40465 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 99 1756 0V32E Specifications Number of Outputs 32 16 points common Module Location ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 390mA 5 1V de amp 2 0mA 24V de Backplane Power 2 04W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 88W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 20 1 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30 0 V de Nominal Input Voltage 24V de Output Current Rating Derated linearly Per Point 0 35 A maximum 60 C amp 0 5 A maximum 50 C Per Group 5 0 A maximum 60 C amp 8 0 A maximum 50 C Per Module 10 0 A maximum 60 C amp 16 0 A maximum 50 C Surge Current per Point 2 0 A for 10ms each repeatable every2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2 0mA per output Maximum On State Voltage Drop 350mV de 0 5A Maximum Off State Leakage Current Output Delay Time OFF to ON 24V to OV de transition ON to OFF 24V to OV de transition Diagnostic Functions 1 0mA per point 75us nominal 300us maximum 230us nominal 1ms maxim
123. 3 8 4 7 Using scheduled outputs with timestamping 3 8 4 8 Using timestamping Glossary 4 system time using timestamping 1 1 T tasks event 2 11 Timestamping 6 6 6 7 Considering module major revision 3 9 4 8 Diagnostic Timestamp 4 11 For a sequence of events 3 8 4 7 Marking input data change with relative time reference 3 8 4 7 Glossary 4 Tip for using change of state 3 8 4 7 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Used with scheduled outputs 3 8 4 8 6 7 B 9 timestamping system timestamp 1 1 Tips Conserving ControlNet bandwidth 2 11 Scheduled outputs 3 8 4 8 Using change of state in timestamping 3 8 4 7 Using listen only communications format Using pulse test 4 25 triggering event tasks 2 11 Troubleshooting Fault status 3 10 4 9 Fuse status 3 10 4 9 I O status 3 10 4 9 Module status 3 10 4 9 Module status indicators 3 10 4 9 8 1 8 3 Using RSLogix 5000 8 5 troubleshooting module status indicators 1 4 U UL Certification 3 10 4 10 UL certification 1 1 WwW warnings preventing electrostatic discharge 1 6 removal and insertion under power RIUP 1 6 Wiring Connections Choosing the extended depth housing 5 9 Field wiring options 3 15 4 21 Isolated and non isolated modules 3 12 4 15 Recommendations for wiring RTB 5 7 Using the cage clamp RTB 5 6 Using the interface module IFM Glossary 2 Using the NEMA clamp RTB 5 6 Using the removable terminal block RTB 5 3 5 4 Gloss
124. 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection m 0 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 41 1756 1V16 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 14 i IES HI k IN 1 Misty QD IN 0 OoO IN 3 IN 2 HNO 4 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name Group 0 sad D Group 0 are connected together on
125. 4 26 Point Level Electronic Fusing 4 27 Field Power Loss Detection 4 29 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 4 30 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 4 4 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Modules The features described in this section are all available on all ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All ControlLogix I O diagnostic modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s LED fault indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature allows you to determine how your module has been affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation Fully Software Configurable The RSLogix 5000 software uses a custom easily understood interface to write configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You can also use the so
126. 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 46 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10
127. 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 97 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6
128. 500 1750 2250 2500 2750 3250 RPI multicast 1 Sec 2 Sec 3 Sec 41381 Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the program scan it is possible for an input to change state during program scan execution The point must be buffered to prevent this Copy the input data from your input tags to another structure and use the data from there TIP To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth we recommend you use a larger RPI value if the COS option is used and the module is located in the same chassis as its owner Triggering Event Tasks When configured to do so ControlLogix digital input modules can trigger an event task The event task offers ControlLogix controller users a task that executes a section of logic immediately when an event i e receipt of new data occurs Your ControlLogix digital I O module can trigger event tasks whenever module input data state changes e g when a COS occurs When using a digital input module to trigger an event task remember these considerations e Only one input module can trigger a specific event task e Input modules trigger the event task based on the module s COS configuration The COS configuration defines which points prompt the module to produce data if they turn on or off This production of data due to COS triggers the event task e Typically enable COS for only one point on the module If you enable COS for multiple points a task overlap of the event task may o
129. 56 MO2AE 3 1 The fault type is listed here For a detailed listing of the possible faults their causes and suggested solutions see Module Faults in the online help Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Troubleshooting Your Module 8 7 Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about troubleshooting the module What s Next Appendix A explains Tag Definitions Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 8 8 Troubleshooting Your Module Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Appendix A Module Tag Names and Definitions Tag Definitions The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module and the Communications Format chosen during configuration Standard Input Module Tags Tables A 1 and A 2 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix standard digital input modules Input modules have two types of tags e configuration e input data mA The table below lists all possible standard input module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Table A 1 Standard Input Module Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor Configuration or 1 0 Data Definition COSOnOffEn Configuration Change of State ON to OFF Triggers an event in the controller for ON to OFF 1bit per point transition of input poin
130. 58D EN P October 2004 3 4 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Using Features Common to ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Modules The features described in this section are all available on all ControlLogix standard digital I O modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All ControlLogix I O modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s LED fault indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature allows you to determine how your module has been affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation Fully Software Configurable The RSLogix 5000 software uses a custom easily understood interface to write configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve e serial number e revision information e product code e vendor identification e error fault information e diagnostic count
131. 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx 4 European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection oy when conformal coated 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 59 1756 OA8E NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example L1 can be connected to any terminal marked L1 0 2 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown 3 This wiring example shows a single voltage source 4 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Diagnostic Control Block with Opto amp Transformer Isolation Module feat
132. 69 Lx Logix5000 Controllers Quick Reference 1756 OR107 1789 Lx 1794 Lx PowerFlex 700S 1756 Lx 1769 Lx Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures 1756 PM001 1789 Lx 1794 Lx Programming Manual PowerFlex 700S 1756 Lx 1769 Lx Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instruction Set 1756 RM007 1789 Lx 1794 Lx Reference Manual PowerFlex 700S 1756 Lx 1769 Lx Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions 1756 RM003 1789 Lx 1794 Lx Reference Manual PowerFlex 700S Allen Bradly I O 1 0 Products System Overview CIG S0001 catalog numbers For more information on these products contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales office Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Preface 4 The documentation listed in Table Preface 3 is available at the following locations e http www ab com manuals cl e http www theautomationbookstore com Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Table of Contents Chapter 1 What This Chapter Contains ead Sade eee 1 1 What are ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 1 1 Using an I O Module in the ControlLogix System 1 2 Physical Features of the ControlLogix Digital I O Modules nnana cage eg 988g 4ue had aioe a 1 4 Using Module Identification and Status Information 1 5 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge
133. 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity EC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n Zone 2 when conformal coated EC 61000 4 5 1kV line line DM and 2kV lin
134. 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 610 4kV at 4kV at 00 4 4 2 5kHz on power ports 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 45 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx E ropean Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protectio
135. 8 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 4kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80MHz to 1000MHz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 1kV at 5kHz on power ports 1kV at 5kHz on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Rad
136. 92 CABLExY 40 11 7 mm 0 46 in 1756 TBCH 1492 CABLExZ 0 Cables are available in lengths of 0 5m 1 0m 2 5m and 5 0m To order insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog number in place of the x 005 0 5m 010 1 0m 25 2 5m 050 5m Build to order cable lengths are also available Table F 2 describes the I O module ready prewired cables available for use with your ControlLogix digital I O modules Table F3 Catalog Number Number of Conductor Size Nominal Outer RTB at the 1 0 l Conductors Diameter Module End B 1492 CABLExTBNH 20 18 AWG 11 4 mm 0 45 in 1756 TBNH 1492 CABLExTBCH 402 14 1 mm 0 55 in 1756 TBCH 1 Cables are available in lengths of 0 5m 1 0m 2 5m and 5 0m To order insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog number in place of the x 005 0 5m 010 1 0m 25 2 5m 050 5m Build to order cable lengths are also available 2 Four conductors are not connected to the RTB Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Glossary Broadcast Data transmissions to all address or functions Bumpless reconfiguration A reconfiguration in which the real time data connection to the module is not closed and reopened Communications are never interrupted and configuration data is applied to the module immediately This works best in a single owner controller system Change of state COS Any change in the ON or OFF state of a point
137. 92 IFM20F FS 120 4 Isolated with 4 terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 OA8E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D 120 4 LED indicating Isolated with 120V ac LEDs and 4 terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs Isolated with extra terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs Isolated with 4 terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 CABLExV x cable length Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 F 6 Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module Table F1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable catalog or amber Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 0B16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40DS24 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse in
138. B onto the module to connect wiring Terminal Block RTB will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB s terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury Shock hazard exists If the RTB is installed onto the module while the field side power is applied the The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before installing the RTB onto the module Before installing the RTB make certain e field side wiring of the RTB has been completed e the RTB housing is snapped into place on the RTB e the RTB housing door is closed e the locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked 1 Align the top bottom and left side guides of the RTB with the guides on the module m 6 Se EN kN EN es ee ofS Top guide GLRA KC GEE AAA ZZ r Left side guides Bottom guide 20853 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 5 12 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 2 Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until the latches snap into place
139. BR or 1756 ENBT for the local chassis 3 Configure the communications module in the local chassis For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules see the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface user manual publication 1756 6 5 3 For more information on the ControlLogix EtherNet IP Bridge module see the ControlLogix EtherNet IP Bridge module user manual publication 1756 UM050 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 17 4 Configure a communications module for the remote chassis G MainProgram nscheduled Programs E Motion Groups ER Module Defined 140 Configuration 1 17561B32 B Conveyor 2 1756 0A8E 3 1756448D 4 1756 0A8D A Right click on the local communications module B Click New Module Flin 5 Select a communications module for the remote chassis 6 Configure the communications module in the remote chassis Module Properties Local_CNB 1756 CNB D 5 1 U Rack Optimization i 2 Compatible Module ha mea cack New _ e Now you can configure the remote I O modules by adding them to the remote communications module Follow the same procedures as you do for configuring local I O modules as detailed earlier in this chapter Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 18 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Input Online Services Diagnos
140. CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive complian EN 50082 2 Industri EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements ial Immunity EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant wi AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions with 1 2 3 TTL inputs are inverted 0 2 to 0 8 low voltage True On Use a NOT instruction in your program to convert to traditional True High logic Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 4 See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 32 1756 111 NOTES 1 IN 0 Module Specific Information 6l All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example DC can be connected to either terminal marked GND 15 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you use the second GND 15 terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain to the terminal directly connected to the supply wire as
141. DOGE Rockwell Automation 1 ALLEN BRADLEY DR MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124 9705 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES PLEASE REMOVE Rockwell Automation Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the web to assist you in using our products At http support rockwellautomation com you can Support find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect Support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http support rockwellautomation com Installation Assistance If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first 24 hours of installation please review the information that s contained in this manual You can also contact a special Customer Support number for initial help in getting your module up and running United States 1 440 646 3223 Monday Friday 8am 5pm EST Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any States technical support issues New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell tests all of our products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing f
142. Delay Time OFF to ON Oms maximum ON to OFF Oms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Output Current Rating Resistive Inductive at rated power 2A 5 30V de 2 0A steady state 5 30V de 0 5A 48V de 0 5A steady state 48V dc 0 25A 125V de 0 25A steady state 125V dc 2A 125V ac 2 0A steady state 15A make 125V ac 2A 240V ac 2 0A steady state 15A make 240V ac Power Rating steady state 250W maximum for 125V ac resistive output 480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output 31W maximum for 125V dc resistive output 250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output 480VA maximum for 240V ac inductive output 60VA maximum for 30V dc inductive output 24VA maximum for 48V de inductive output 31VA maximum for 125V de inductive output Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 The Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Isolation Voltage User to system 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546
143. Detection Diagnostic output modules 4 23 No Load Word Diagnostic output modules 4 31 4 32 0 Online Services Input modules 6 18 Output modules 6 19 Open Wire Detection 4 16 Open Wire Word Diagnostic input modules 4 29 4 30 Output Data Echo 2 14 2 18 3 14 4 20 Output Fault State Configuable in RSLogix 5000 3 13 Output Fault States Configuring in RSLogix 5000 4 19 Output Online Services 6 19 Output Verification Diagnostic output modules 4 24 Output Verify Word Diagnostic output modules 4 31 4 32 Owner Controller Logix5550 Controller 2 2 Ownership 2 2 Direct connections 2 6 Listen only 2 18 Listen only rack optimization 2 7 Multiple owners Glossary 3 Multiple owners of input modules 2 19 Owner controller Glossary 3 Owner controller I O module relationship 2 2 Rack connection 2 7 Glossary 3 Rack optimization 2 7 2 8 Remote connection Glossary 4 Remote connections for input modules only 2 12 Remote connections for output modules only 2 15 P Point Level Fault Reporting Diagnostic modules 4 12 preventing electrostatic discharge 1 6 Producer Consumer Network model 2 9 2 14 3 9 4 9 producer consumer communications 1 1 network model 1 1 Product Identification Major revision Glossary 2 Minor revision Glossary 3 product identification catalog number 3 5 4 5 major revision 3 5 4 5 minor revision 3 5 4 5 product type 3 5 4 5 vendor 3 5 4 5 Program Mode Glossary 3 Pulse Test Diagnostic output modules 4 25
144. Digital 1 0 Module Features Listing of the features that are common to all diagnostic ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules Chapter 5 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module Step by step description of how to install ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules Chapter 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Description of how to configure ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules with RSLogix 5000 Chapter 7 Module Specific Information A complete listing of module specific information for each ControlLogix digital 1 0 module catalog number including e wiring diagram e simplified schematic e status indicators e specifications Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Your Module Description of how to use status indicators and RSLogix 5000 to troubleshoot your application Appendix A Tag Definitions Listing and description of module defined data types and tags available with ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules Appendix B Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services Explanation of how to use ladder logic to perform and Reconfiguration run time services on your module Appendix C Power Supply Sizing Chart Chart you can use to verify how much power is used in your ControlLogix chassis Appendix D Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Explanation of how to choose a ControlLogix digital Modules 1 0 module to use with a Bulletin 500 Series motor starter Appendix E Hardware Response Times Listing of nominal hardware response times for some ControlLogix de 1 0 modules
145. F EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equ CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locat FM FM Approved Equipment for use A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab EN 50082 2 Industria EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immu EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emi EEx 4 European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n ipment ions in Class Division 2 Group ndustrial Requirements nity ssions 1 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Use this conductor category info Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 80 Module Specific I
146. FF to ON 1ms maximum ON to OFF 5ms maximum Diagnostic Functions Short trip gt 4 5A for 500s maximum Output ON then short gt 4 5A for 1 5ms maximum Output ON into short Time stamp of 1ms diagnostics Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Fusing Electronically fused per point Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 82 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold
147. Figure 6 3 below Output State in Fault Mode Transition from Program 3 13 State to Fault State Field Power Loss Detection 3 18 Diagnostic Latching 3 19 Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Figure 6 3 shows how to configure your standard output module Figure 6 3 A Set the state of each output during program mode and fault mode Module Properties Local 1756 OA8E 2 1 B Enable Field Power Loss detection for Point Dubus DU Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Latching each output lonr or A l 7 e Check the box to enable field to zoe x 5 z 2i jott zjott x v v power loss detection ior lon E a Fe i 4 Ort sort x mi m e Clear the box to disable field power on ston gt _ gt F loss detection e loft xlo xi j r z of lort i Oo hn munications Failure IF communications fail in C Enable Diagnostic Latching for each output Leave outputs in Program Mode state D Set the state of the outputs if communications fail in program mode Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state E Cancel lt Back Next gt Help Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 12 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configuring a Diagnostic Table 6 6 lists the ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules and Input Module the configurable features they support Table 6 6
148. G uomaan f Not used 36 35 Not used sales representative to order DC additional jumper bars if gt necessary N 5 If separate power sources are Daisy chain to other RTBs 30242 M used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator bean LP gt DC OUTPUT 5V j KR 8 l t 16 5 2A Continuous 30 C A eS ay gt an ae 3 T st 8 9 101112131415 CI iin ee ar gt t as OUT 0 Continuous 60 C 5 Control Bus Interface 5 Display 0 Time 10ms 40457 M 30182 M 40849 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 69 1756 0B16I Specifications Number of Outputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 350mA 5 1V de amp 2 5mA 24V de 1 8W Total backplane power Maximum Power Dissipation 3 gw 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 12 28 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V de Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 30 C amp 1A maximum 60 C Linear derating Per Module 8A maximum 30 C amp 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Surge Current Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s Minimum Load Current 1mA per point Maximum On State Voltage 1 2V dc 2A Drop Maximum Off State Leakage 0 5mA per point Current Output Delay Time OFF to ON 1ms maximum ON to OFF 2ms maximum S
149. Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 2000MHz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Oscillatory Surge IEEE C37 90 1 Withstand 4kV Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 6
150. IM161 7 35 1756 OB8EI 7 80 1756 IN16 7 38 1756 0C8 7 83 1756 IV16 7 41 1756 0G16 7 86 1756 IV32 7 44 1756 OH8 7 89 1756 ON8 7 92 1756 OV16E 7 95 1756 O0V32E 7 98 1756 OW16l 7 101 1756 OX8I 7 104 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 2 Module Specific Information 1756 1A16 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 9ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 1 IN 1 IL 41 IN O_ _ _s o cD KD IN 3 Wa TH IN 2 b gt D NOTES 1 All terminals with the same NS TES e a Sue name are connected together on 7 the module For example L2 can IN 7 a ie IN 6 be connected to any terminal ok cal p marked L2 0 PROTES L2 0 ES IEB 120 2 Do not physically connect more he A than two wires to a single RTB IN 9 HOE id IN 8 terminal When you daisy chain is gt IN 11 4 i IN 1 from a group to another RTB T R 0 Siina always connect the daisy chain In 13 aS IN 12 roup as shown INU K 3 This wiring example shows a IN 15 Was ia IN 14 single voltage source Lp Lbs 4 If separate po
151. IN 8 Thi ii put de IN 1 Hep ID IN 10 Capacitor 5V dc power i T E 0 01uF typical IN 1 ID IN 12 See notes below IN t UEB E IN 14 Zi 1 ID IA pe 1 ED iE oc com 1 GENERAL NOTES 1 We recommend you use Belden 8761 cable where shielded cables are shown 2 Do not connect more than two wires to any single terminal 3 This example shows devices wired to only one of two groups on the module You can make connections to the second group on terminals 11 20 CE REQUIREMENT NOTES 1 DC power wire and 1 0 wire should not exceed 10m 30ft in length 2 The 0 01uF capacitors shown above must be rated for 2000V dc LED indicator DC INPUT 8 T012345670 ST 8 9 10 111213 1415 K 20945 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 IG16 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 110mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Backplane Power 0 61W Maximum Power Dissipation 1 aw 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 4 8 BTU hr 60 C Operating Voltage 4 5 to 5 5V de source 50mV P P ripple maximum Voltage Category 5V de TTL Low True Off State Voltage 2 0V de maximum Off State Current 4 1mA maximum Input Impedance 1 4KQ minimum 1 5kQ typical Low True Format The module ope
152. INPUT IN O 1 3 2 ST01234567 0 GND 0 K l V K ST 8 9 101112131415 K E E 6 GND lt ControlBus Display Interface 30183 M 20945 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 21 1756 IB161 Specifications Number of Inputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V de amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation 5W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 7 05 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 30V de Nominal Input Voltage 24V de On State Current 2mA 10V de minimum 10mA 30 V de maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 5V de Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 3kQ 30V de Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 1ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 4ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of state Software configurable Time stamp of inputs 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User side to system side 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 seco
153. M058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 31 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Op IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Op IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb O 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F erating Cold erating Dry Heat perating Thermal Shoc Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na U Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F packaged Non operati packaged Non operating Dry Heat n packaged Non opera ng Cold ing Thermal Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db U 5 to 95 non condensing n packaged Non opera ing Damp Heat Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 4kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80MHz to 1000MHz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 1kV at 5kHz on power ports 1kV at 5kHz on signal ports Conducted RF Immunity EC 61000 4 6 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial C ontrol Equipment
154. MOS ood ae bs 3 4a oerts sesh cients Bec Bode Grewh twee Sod As 2 18 Multiple Owners of Input Modules 2 19 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners 9 aes doe hed aed Bee eh eae Sue eS 2 20 Chapter Summary and What s Next 2 21 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Table of Contents 2 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 What This Chapter Contains y s fais tne Hoe Ke 3 1 Determining Input Module Compatibility 3 1 Determining Output Module Compatibility 3 2 Features on ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Modules 3 3 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Modules 5 a1 lt 63 bse hah g s 6 ho 04 eo Raed 3 4 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 3 4 Module Fault Reporting sci i ee ace oo OK Fee Sat 3 4 Fully Software Configurable 005 3 4 Electronic Keying sce ee ecrire tna ke a AOU PR Goi Sed 3 5 Module Inhibiting Gus x vate Mine aces ope aa ea 3 7 Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs 6 hice 4 eked od boa tle Micee Bak Gedtcs 3 8 Producer Consumer Model 0 00 0000000 3 9 Status Indicator Informations eae eee A ater s 3 10 Full Class I Division 2 Compliance 3 10 UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV Agency Approvals 3 10 Using Features Specific to Standard Input Modules 3 11 Data Transfer on Ei
155. Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 14 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Output Data Echo During normal operation when a processor sends an output command out to the ControlLogix system the output module that is targeted for that command will return the commanded state of the output to the system to verify the module received the command and will try to execute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal via a listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the owner controller Monitor Fault Bits The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is a problem with the module the commanded state and the Output Data Echo may not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions If a fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the Output Data Echo check your output module for the following conditions e Communications fault e Connection is inhibited e Blown fuse Module will not turn ON output if overload short circuit is detected e Loss of field power 1756 OA8D
156. Module Name Slot4_OA8D 5 8 1 0 Configuration 11175614161 Siott_tatel 2117561832 Slot2 1832 3 1756 0B16E Siot3_0B16E D Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration B 9 Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs This example demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for digital I O The CST can be utilized to synchronize the output turning OFF to ON based upon the time that the input transitioned OFF to ON The program can be extended to include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules For this example the output will follow the state of the input 0 but it will be delayed by exactly 10ms The advantage of using CST over timers is that the synchronization is being performed at the I O module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communication delays Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads For this synchronization to work properly the 10ms delay must be long enough to account for any controller backplane and network delays The input and output modules must reside in the same rack as a Time Master i e Controller Timestamp units are Usecs Rungs 0 and 1 are used to detect the transition from PROGRAM to RUN mode This is used to turn ON init which causes the program to initialize its tags Rung 2 only execu
157. Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications _ UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product is marked CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class l Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissi
158. OFF to ON 450us maximum 5V to OV dc transition 145us nominal ON to OFF 700us maximum OV to 5V dc transition Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable Fault4 States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable Fault States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Reverse Polarity Protection None None Damage to circuitry could result Isolation Group 2 groups of 8 Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 250V maximum continuous 250V maximum continuous Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 position RTB 1756 TBNH or 1756 TBSH 2 RTB Screw Torque NEMA clamp 7 to 9 inch pounds 0 8 to 1Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 3 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 88 Module Specific Information Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 6006
159. October 2004 7 36 Module Specific Information 1756 IM16I Specifications Number of Inputs 16 Individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V de amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 gw 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 9 78 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 159 265V ac 47 63Hz 30 C All Channels ON 59 265V ac 47 63Hz 40 C 8 Points ON 159 253V ac 47 63Hz 45 C All Channels ON 159 242V ac 47 63Hz 60 C All Channels ON Nominal Input Voltage 240V ac On State Current 5mA 159V ac 60Hz minimum 13mA 265V ac 60Hz maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 40V ac Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 20 38kQ 60Hz 265V ac Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 10ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 8ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of state Time stamp of inputs Software configurable 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200s minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 265V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keyi
160. Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when produc is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions
161. P October 2004 Table 4 4 Use of timestamping Timestamping in Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 9 Definition Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs feature so that after input data changes state and a timestamp occurs an output point will actuate at some configured time in the future You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs you must e choose a Communications Format for each input and output module that allows timestamping For more information on choosing a Communications Format see Chapter 6 e have a controller in the same rack as both 1 0 modules e disable Change of State for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped For scheduled outputs to work most effectively remember the following e The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for any controller backplane and network delays e The l 0 modules must reside in the same rack as the timemaster For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic to use these features see Appendix B Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules remember the following conditions that may occur depending on the module s Major Revision e If the module has a Major Rev
162. Performing with ladder logic B 12 Usage tips 4 25 Rack Connection 2 7 2 8 Usage recommendations 2 8 Rack Connections 2 7 Glossary 3 Rack Optimization 2 7 2 8 6 6 Glossary 3 Rack Optimization Communications Format 6 7 Remote Chassis Configuring remote 1 0 modules 6 16 Using input modules 2 12 Scenarios for data transfer 2 13 Using output modules 2 15 Scenarios for data transfer 2 17 Remote Connections Glossary 4 Removable Terminal Block RTB 5 3 Glossary 4 Installing 5 11 Mechanically keying the RTB 5 3 Removing 5 13 Using with the housing 5 8 Wiring the RTB 5 4 removable terminal block RTB 1 2 1 4 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 3 4 4 4 5 1 Glossary 4 removal and insertion under power RIUP 1 1 1 6 Requested Packet Interval RPI 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 17 Glossary 4 Index 5 Adjusting in RSLogix 5000 6 9 Retrieving Module Identification Information B 13 retrieving module identification information 1 5 Retrieving Module Status B 13 retrieving module status 1 5 RSLogix 5000 ee I O modules 2 2 3 4 4 4 2 Filter times 3 12 4 15 using software configuration tags A 1 Using to troubleshoot 8 5 Using with RSNetWorx 2 2 RSNetWorx Transferring data to networked 0 modules and establishing a NUT 2 2 Using with RSLogix 5000 2 2 RSNetworx adding a new module to a remote ControlNet chassis 2 3 S Scheduled Output Data Communications Format 6 7 Scheduled Outputs 3 8 4 7 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 7
163. Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Tag Definitions A 7 Input Data Tags Table A 7 Diagnostic Input Module Input Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to indicate the 8 bytes time that data changed see COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn FieldPwrLossEn Data Input data Off On status for the input point 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and input data 1 bit per point for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor 0 no fault 1 fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault FieldPwrLoss Input Data Field Power Loss AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is 1 bit per point disconnected from the module Open Wire will also be detected 0 no fault 1 fault OpenWire Input data Open Wire Diagnostic which detects that a wire has been disconnected from the 1 bit per point input point If a group of points all show this fault then possibly the return L1 or GND is missing from the mod
164. RPI the module multicasts data within its own chassis e The 1756 ENBT module in the remote chassis immediately sends the module s data over the network to the owner controller as long as it has not sent data within a timeframe that is 1 4 the value of the digital input module s RPI For example if a digital input module uses an RPI 100ms the 1756 ENBT module only sends module data immediately on receiving it if another data packet was not sent within the last 25ms An owner controller sends output data to an output module when either one of two things occur e at the end of every one of its tasks local chassis only and or e at the rate specified in the module s RPI When an output module physically resides in a remote chassis with respect to the owner controller the owner controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate specified for the module Updates are not performed at the end of the owner controller s tasks Whenever the module receives data from the controller it immediately multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system The actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data and multicast back out onto the network This is called Output Data Echo The Output Data Echo also may contain fault and diagnostic information depending on the module type IMPORTANT In this Producer Consumer model the output module is the Consumer of the controller s output data a
165. Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power p 4kV at 2 5 orts Hz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industri ial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 Use this conductor category info Refer to publication 177
166. Singapore 307987 Tel 65 351 6723 Fax 65 355 1733 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 PN 957726 67 Supersedes Publication 1756 UMO058C EN P March 2001 Copyright 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
167. T Device s catalog code which maps to its catalog WHO_Information 4 WHO_catalog_code 2 number INT Device s major revision WHO_Information 6 WHO_major_revision 1 SINT Device s minor revision WHO_Information 7 WHO_minor_revision 1 SINT Device s internal status WHO_Information 8 WHO_status 2 Bit 0 O unowned 1 owned INT Bit 2 O unconfigured 1 configured Bits 7 4 forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status For Digital 1 0 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communications fault 3 Not owned 4 Unused 5 Internal fault module needs to be flash updated 6 Run Mode 7 Program Mode N A for input modules Bit 8 O no fault 1 Minor recoverable fault e g backplane error detected Bit 9 O no fault 1 Minor non recoverable fault Bit 10 O no fault 1 Major recoverable fault Bit 11 O no fault 1 Major non recoverable fault e g module needs to be reflashed Bits 15 12 unused Device s serial number WHO_Information 10 WHO_serial_number 4 DINT Number of characters in the text string WHO_Information 14 WHO_string_length 1 SINT Device s ASCII text string describing the module WHO_Information 15 WHO_ascii_string 32 Table B 3 lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the message instructions described in Table B 2 Table B 3 Source and Destination Field Tags Source Tag Description Enable_32_ Points DINT Parameter used to determine which points ar
168. TBs D D terminal marked GND 0 GND 0 i i 2 Do not physically connect more T than two wires to a single RTB IN 9 i ice terminal When you daisy chain ot i from a group to another RTB i K ie always connect the daisy chain z if as shown Group 1 IN 13 We lie 3 This wiring example shows a i i single voltage source IN 15 ID K 4 If separate power sources are 7 i H used do not exceed the specified ne i D 1 isolation voltage DC COM 40177 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V x IN 0 i DC INPUT I 3 am l bas 8101234567 0 ij L K i a ae ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K GND ControlBus Display 20945 M Interface 30183 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 1756 I1B16 Specifications Module Specific Information 7 15 Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 56W Maximum Power Dissipation 51W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 10 31 2V de Nominal Input Voltage 24V de On State Current 2 0mA 10V de minimum 10mA 31 2V de maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 5V Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 31 2V de 3 12kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 290s nominal 1ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time
169. TN OUT 2 o 11 OUT 2 DC 3 E B OUT 3 Non isolated wiri RTN OUT 3 Tete 15 g OUT 3 on isolated wiring DC 4 Ee 17 OUT 4 Daisy chain to RTN OUT 4 q 20 19 OUT 4 other RTBs DC 5 g2 2g OUT 5 RTN OUT 5 o 23 OUT 5 o DC 6 qg 2 OUT 6 A _ 4 RTN OUT 6 2 27 OUT 6 DC 7 E 0 29 OUT 7 RTN OUT 7 2 31 OUT 7 Daisy chain to Not used A 34 33 Not used other RTBs o Notused E 3 35 g Not used F Surge Current Chart LED indicator 4A Surge G gt DC OUTPUT Continuous 3 60 C T 2A ST012345670 ouro 5 FUSE 01234567 K d gt 8 OUT 0 5 i jM ELECTRONICALLY FUSED RTN 0 OUT 0 ime OM 30351 M 40849 M 40467 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 81 1756 OB8El Specifications Number of Outputs 8 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 250mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 1 30W Maximum Power Dissipation 4 7 W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 16 03 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V de Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 10A maximum 60 C amp 16A maximum 55 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s Minimum Load Current 3mA per point Maximum On State Voltage 1 2V dc 2A Drop Maximum Off State Leakage 1mA per point Current Output Delay Time O
170. Tag A named area of the controller s memory where data is stored Timestamping ControlLogix process that stamps a change in input data with a relative time reference of when that change occurred Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 A Agency Certification Class Division 2 UL CSA FM and CE 3 10 4 10 agency certification Class Division 2 UL CSA FM and CE 1 1 C Cage Clamp RTB 5 6 CE Certification 3 10 4 10 CE certification 1 1 Change of State Diagnostic change of state 4 17 Change of State COS 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 17 6 10 Glossary 1 Diagnostic modules 4 17 4 29 Class Division 2 Certification 3 10 4 10 Class I Division 2 certification 1 1 Communications Producer consumer model 2 9 2 14 Communications Format 6 3 6 6 Glossary 1 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5 CST timestamped fuse data output data 6 7 CST timestamped fuse data scheduled output data 6 7 CST timestamped input data 6 6 Full diagnostic output data 6 7 Full diagnostic input data 6 6 Full diagnostics scheduled output data 6 7 Input module formats 6 6 Listen only 6 6 6 7 Output module formats 6 7 Rack optimization 6 6 6 7 Glossary 3 Scheduled output data 6 7 Usage tip 6 6 Configuration Accessing module tags 6 20 Altering the default configuration 6 9 Configuring a diagnostic input module 12 Configuring a diagnostic output module Configuring a nondiagnostic input module 6 10 Index Configuring a nondiagnosti
171. The screens below display fault notification in RSLogix 5000 Warning signal on main screen RSLogix 5000 Use 56 BEE ey a ef lal N 3 7 ama alu fae fa a ee fotas fFocesOnabes Mag mee UL J E Controller User_doc Controller Tags Controller Fault Hand Power Up Handler ES Tasks 5 7 1 0 Configuration A 0 1756 ENET B ENET Phe 2 1756 IB16D DIAG_INPUT He 4 1756 0B16D DIAG_OUTI Haw 5 1756 CNB B CONTROLK J fh 19 1756 MO2AE MOTION T Warning signal The module in slot 9 has faulted Warning icon when a communications fault occurs or if the module is inhibited Fault message in status line fl Module Properties Local 9 1756 M02AE 3 1 x Sais Ceen neta Status line provides information on the module s fault and on the connection Bunt to the module Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 8 6 Troubleshooting Your Module Notification in Tag Editor User_doc controler Showa E Tag Name F TagName Vale tf Fon A fault has occurred for any point that lists the number 1 in the Fault line a a a i i fe gt Monitor Tags Determining Fault Type When you are monitoring a module s configuration properties in RSLogix 5000 and receive a Communications fault message the Connection page lists the type of fault E Module Properties Local 9 17
172. These input modules Offer these configurable For a full description of features the feature see page 1756 IA8D Change of State 4 15 VAS toe Input Filter Times 4 16 Open Wire Detection 4 17 Field Power Loss Detection 4 19 Diagnostic Latching 4 11 Diagnostic Change of State 4 18 Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Figure 6 4 shows how to configure your diagnostic input module Figure 6 4 Module Properties Local 1756 IB16D 2 1 A Enable COS for individual points M On gt Off B Enable Open Wire detection for individual points C Enable Diagnostic Latching for individual points QAAN D Enable COS for diagnostic transitions This feature can only be set on a module wide basis Newt gt Finish gt gt Heb E Change the Input Filter settings One diagnostic Reset Latched Diagnostics is not used when writing initial configuration but is typically accessed during online monitoring For more information on how to reset Latched Diagnostics see page 6 19 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 13 Configuring a Diagnostic Table 6 7 lists the ControlLogix standard digital output modules and Output Module the configurable features they support Table 6 7 features the feature see page 1756 0B16D Mode Figure 6 3 belo
173. UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection m 0 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other 1756 0B161S Module features Module Specific Information 7 71 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description
174. V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Conductors Wire Size Category 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum 10 3 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 103 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Tes EC 60068 2 2 Tes Ad Operating Cold Bd Operating Dry Heat C 600 68 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature C 600 C 600 m m m C 60068 2 14 Test 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F 68 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold 68 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat a Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock Relative Humidity IEC 600 68 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2
175. V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when produc is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this condu
176. We oie ee pe Remade s 4 4 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 4 4 Module Fault Reporting zacove ne nde eK eed 2 et 4 4 Fully Software Configurable 005 4 4 Electronic Keying nooo gt tne tye Fe be Be Bees 4 5 Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs Us 047 a hetwety bees a 4 7 Producer Consumer Model 0 0 000 0000000 4 9 Status Indicator Information 40422 4 9 4 2 o4 25 2 s 4 9 Full Class I Division 2 Compliance 4 10 UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV Agency Approvals 4 10 Diagnostic Latch of Information 4 10 Diagnostic Timestamp as o oo naaa 4 11 8 Point AC 16 Point DC aaau aana 4 11 Point Level Fault Reporting anode ke aaa 4 12 Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 4 14 Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time 4 14 Software Configurable Filter Times 4 15 Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules 4 15 Multiple Input Point Densities cca lt 6 weve ce oe ees 4 15 Open Wire Detection n o anaa aaa 4 16 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 4 17 Field Power Loss Detection o n anaana aaa 4 18 Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 4 19 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States 4 19 Output Data Echos 2 5 ler pee dy bless ERD aye el Pee Cos 4 20 Field Wiring Options awn 2 ee eK eo EO ed 4 21 Multiple Output Point Densities
177. a changed see COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn FieldPwrLossEn Data Input data Off On status for the input point 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and input data 1 bit per point for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module will be faulted 0 no fault 1 fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Tag Definitions A 3 Standard Output Module Tags Tables A 3 to A 5 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix standard digital output modules Output modules have three types of tags e configuration e input data e output data IMPORTANT The table below lists all possible standard output module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Table A 3 Standard Output Module Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor FaultMode 1 bit per point FaultValue 1 bit per point ProgMode 1 bit per point Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Configuration Configuration Definition Fault Mode Used in
178. able The features described in this section are available on all ControlLogix digital input modules Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time Your ControlLogix input module sends data in one of the ways described in Table 3 6 Table 3 6 Method of Description Sending Data Requested A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent Packet Interval to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer Change of State Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON The data will be sent at the RPI rate By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Digital input modules always send data at the RPI but only send data at a change of state if the COS feature is enabled Set the RPI rate and enable COS for specific input points as shown below E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IA16 2 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI 10 02 ms 0 2 750 0 ms T Inhibit Module J Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IA16 2 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Enable Change of State a Input Fitter Time Point Off gt r On g
179. acility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number see phone number above to obtain one to your distributor in order to complete the return process Outside United Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for States return procedure www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 BP 3A B 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Rockwell Automation Br hlstraRe 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House
180. al Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx 9 European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n when conformal coated 7 The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA I V R At 50mA and above the mod be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA ule has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 range the L1 AC waveform could be at fault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections 2 3 Maximum wi installation manual 4 5 Refer to pub certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ire size requires ex
181. allation manual Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 38 Module Specific Information 1756 IN16 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 13 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same Bs i i p IN 1 D eB N 0 s name are connected together j T on the module For example L1 IN 3 ic ie IN 2 A L2 can be connected to any L terminal marked L2 0 IN 5 IT IE IN 4 2 Do not physically connect L2 E Group 0 more than two wires to a IN 7 ie i IN 6 single RTB terminal When to you daisy chain from a group L2 0 JSF ie 12 0 to another RTB always ue a connect the daisy chain IN 9 ic N 43 o lt as shown
182. ary go offline RS RSLogix 5000 Digital_I0 1756 Eile Edit View Search Logic Comm Rem Prog No Edits awal a Hae z BL F Program Mode Upload Downoad Ecaanmode Run Mode Test Mode ear Feuits Go fio kauls Me E 2 Add a new module to Controller Properties RSLogix 5000 Digital_IO 1756 L63 Fie Edit View Search Logic Communicatio asla a Hae ele Offline fl E RUN No Forces b e No Edits a see ES Tasks Trends B 63 Data Types Ej g Strings Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 Controller Digital_10 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler E fa MainT ask g MainProgram Unscheduled Programs 5 6 Motion Groups im Ungrouped Axes Gi User Defined Ej g Predefined Ga Module 1 0 Configur Defined New Module Gat Bitte Copy LHe Paste Bibs Frim Cire your RSLogix 5000 project 3 When the Select Module Type screen appears select the new Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules module for your project Select Module Type A Select a module B Click OK 16 Point 79V 132 AC Isolated Input 8 Point 79 132V AC Diagnostic Input 16 Point 10 31 2 DC Input DC Diagnostic Input 16 Point 10 30 DC Isolated Input Sink Source 16 Channel Isolated 247 Input Sequence o
183. ary 4 Using the spring clamp RTB 5 6 wiring connections using the interface module IFM 1 2 using the removable terminal block RTB 1 2 Index 7 wiring example 1756 OA8E module 7 59 1756 IA16 module 7 2 7 8 1756 O0B16D module 7 62 1756 IB16 module 7 14 1756 OB16E module 7 65 1756 IB16D module 7 17 1756 0B16 module 7 68 1756 IB161 module 7 20 1756 OB16IS module 7 71 1756 IB32 B module 7 23 1756 0B32 module 7 74 1756 IC16 module 7 26 1756 OB8 module 7 77 1756 IG16 module 7 29 1756 OB8EI module 7 80 1756 IH161 module 7 32 1756 OC8 module 7 83 1756 IM161 module 7 35 1756 0G16 module 7 86 1756 IN16 module 7 38 1756 OH8I module 7 89 1756 IV16 module 7 41 1756 ON8 module 7 92 1756 IV32 module 7 44 1756 OV16E module 7 95 1756 0A16 module 7 47 1756 0V32E module 7 98 1756 0A16I module 7 50 1756 OW16l module 7 101 1756 OA8 module 7 53 1756 OX8I module 7 104 1756 OA8D module 7 56 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Index 8 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 How Are We Doing PANE Your comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the future Thank you for taking the time to provide us feedback wy You can complete this form and mail or fax it back to us or email us at RADocumentComments ra rockwell com Pub Title Type ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Cat No 1756 Series Pub No 1756 UM058D EN P Pub Date October 2004 Part No 957726 67 Pleas
184. ashing red light Previously established Check controller communication has timed out and chassis communication OK Steady red light The module must be replaced Replace the module 1 0 State Yellow The output is active None 1 0 Fuse Red A short overload fault has Check wiring for occurred for a point in this short overload group Check the module properties in RSLogix 5000 and reset the fuse 1 0 Fault Red A fault has occurred for this Check this point point at the controller The status indicators shown in Figure 8 2 are used on output modules Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 8 4 Troubles 1 0 Fuse hooting Your Module 1756 0A16 gt AC OUTPUT ST 01234567 L HFUSE I 0 ST 8 9 1011213415 FUSE I oQ joa 1756 O0A8D Figure 8 2 1756 0A16l gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST 012345670 ST 8 9 10111213 1415 gt AC OUTPUT ieee rto1234567 O DIAGNOSTIC 1756 OB16E OV16E 1756 OA8E gt AC OUTPUT ST 01234567 g FUSE0 1234567 KI ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 0B16I OB16IS OG16 gt DC OUTPUT ST01234567 FUSE U ae ST 8 9 101112131415 FUSE i ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 0B8 OC8 OHB8i gt DC OUTPUT penn C ST 89 1011121331415
185. at is compliant with the desired communications options specified for each module during configuration Anytime a controller references an I O module in a scheduled ControlNet chassis you must run RSNetWorx to configure ControlNet Follow these general guidelines when configuring I O modules 1 Configure all I O modules for a given controller using RSLogix 5000 and download that information to the controller 2 If the I O configuration data references a module in a remote chassis connected by scheduled ControlNet run RSNetWorx 3 After running RSNetWorx perform an online save of the RSLogix 5000 project so the configuration infromation that RSNetWorx sends to the controller is saved IMPORTANT You must run RSNetWorx whenever a new module is added to a scheduled ControlNet chassis When a module is permanently removed from a remote chassis we recommend that RSNetWorx be run to optimize the allocation of network bandwidth Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 4 Digital O Operation in the ControlLogix System Internal Module Operations Signal propogation delays exist with ControlLogix I O modules that a Signal applied at the RTB must be accounted for when operating them Some of these delays are user selectable and some are inherent to the module hardware For example there is a small delay typically less than 1mS between when a signal is applied at the RTB of a ControlLogix input module and
186. ata the value of the system Full diagnostic input data 1756 lA8D IB16D clock from its local chassis when the input data changed and diagnostic data diagnostic modules only This choice has the same definition as Full diagnostic Listen only full diagnostic input data input data except that it is a listen only connections Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 7 Output Module Formats As with input modules the number and type of choices varies depending on which output module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chassis Table 6 2 lists the communications formats used with input modules Table 6 3 If you want the output module to return this data The owner controller sends the module only output data choose this communication format Output data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Scheduled output data The owner controller sends all digital output words to the remote chassis as a single rack image Rack optimization These choices have the same definition as those above except that they are listen only connections Listen only output data Listen only rack optimization Modules that offer this format 1756 0A16l OA8 OB16l OB161S 0B32 OB8 OC8 0G16 OH8I ONS OW161 OX8I The owner controller sends the module only output data
187. ated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications _ UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product is marked CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Group A B C D Hazardous Locations A B C D Hazardous Locations CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with Class Division 2 compliant with 1 2 3 4 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level inst
188. atures 3 3 Table 3 2 lists features on ControlLogix standard digital I O modules The features are described later in this section Not all the features described in this chapter are available on all ControlLogix standard digital I O modules Table 3 2 lists which modules support each feature described on this page is available on these modules 3 4 Module Fault Reporting 3 4 Fully Software Configurable 3 4 Electronic Keying 3 5 Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs all standard digital input and output 3 8 modules Producer Consumer Model ow 1 co Status Indicator Information Full Class Division 2 Compliance UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV Agency Approvals Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time a 3 3 3 3 Software Configurable Filter Times 3 12 AA standard digital input modules Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Modules 3 12 Multiple Input Point Densities 3 12 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States 3 13 Output Data Echo 3 14 a standard digital output modules Field Wiring Options 3 15 Multiple Output Point Densities 3 15 Fusing 3 15 1756 0A8E 1756 0B16E 1756 OB8EI 1756 OV16E 1756 OV32E Field Power Loss Detection 3 18 1756 OA8E Diagnostic Latch of Information 3 19 1756 OA8E Time Scheduled Output Control 3 20 1756 OB16IS Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO0
189. be connected to any terminal marked GND 1 Daisy chain 2 Do not physically connect to other more than two wires to a RTBs single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown 3 This wiring example shows a single voltage source 4 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic 5V IN O o Cv VVV GND 0 F NEK a kK L i i ControlBus Interface Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 fer om aa a SISISISIEISIEIISIS SISISIS ISIS ISIS DC COM Display 30350 M 40179 M LED indicator DC INPUT T01234567 0 ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K 20945 M 1756 1C16 Specifications Module Specific Information 7 27 Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 100mA 5 1V de amp 3mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 2W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 17 73 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 30 55V de 60 C all channels Linear derating 30 60V de 55 C all channels Li
190. blicati on 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 F 4 Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module Table F 1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable ae Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 IV16 1756 IV32 1756 0A16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1756 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 XIMF 2 Expander with eight feed through channels 1492 IFM20D120N LED indicating Narrow standard with 120V ac LEDs 1492 IFM20D120 2 120V ac dc LEDs and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F 2 Fusible Extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F1 20 2 Extra terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F F240 2 Extra terminals with 240V ac blown fuse indicators for otuputs 1492 XIMF F120 2 Expander with eight 120V ac channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM120 8R Relay Expander with eight 120V ac relays 1756 0A16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS120 4 LED indicating Isolated with 120V ac LEDs and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 1492 IFM40F FS120 2 1492 IFM40F FS120 4 1492 IFM40F FS240 4 Fusible Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Isolated with extra terminals for outputs Isolated with extra terminals and 120V ac blown fuse indicators for output
191. c output module 6 11 Configuring modules in remote chassis 6 16 Creating a new module 6 4 Dynamic reconfiguration 6 14 Editing configuration in RSLogix 5000 6 14 Local vs remote chassis 6 1 Message configuration with ladder logic B 4 Overview of the process 6 2 Using module tags A 1 A 3 A 5 A 8 Using RSLogix 5000 6 2 Using the default configuration 6 8 Configuring a ControlLogix System Using RSLogix 5000 2 2 Using RSNetWorx 2 2 Connections 2 6 Glossary 1 ControlBus Glossary 1 Differences between direct and rack connections 2 9 Direct connection 2 6 Glossary 1 Listen only connection Glossary 2 Listen only rack optimization 2 7 Number allowed 2 7 Rack connection 2 7 Rack optimization 2 7 2 8 6 6 connections connector pins on the module 1 4 ControlBus 1 4 ControlBus Connector Glossary 1 ControlBus connector 1 4 Controller Logix5550 Controller 2 2 ControlNet 2 2 Direct connections 2 6 Input modules in remote chassis 2 12 Network Update Time NUT Glossary 3 Output modules in remote chassis 2 15 Rack connection 2 7 Glossary 3 Rack optimization 2 7 Glossary 3 Tip on conserving bandwidth 2 11 Coordinated System Time CST Glossary 1 CSA Certification 3 10 4 10 CSA certification 1 1 CST Timestamped Fuse Data Output Data Communications Format 6 7 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Index 2 CST Timestamped Fuse Data Scheduled Output Data Communications Format 6 7 CST Times
192. cator DC INPUT st01234567 8 111111 ST89 012345 E gp 11112222 67890123 A gt 22222233 45678901 30082 M Module Specific Information 1756 IV32 Specifications 7 45 Number of Inputs 32 16 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 120mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 66W Maximum Power Dissipation 4 1W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 14 BTU hr 60 C On State Voltage Range 10 30V de Nominal Input Voltage 24V de ON State Current 10V de 2mA 30V de 3 5mA Maximum Off State Voltage 5V de Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 8 6kQ 30V de Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 350us 1ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 590us 2ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of state Timestamp on inputs Short Inrush Current Software configurable 200us 250mA peak decaying to lt 37 in 22ms without activation Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4
193. ccur For more information on using event tasks see the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication 1756 PMO001 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 12 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System Input Modules ina If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the owner controller is e g a remote chassis connected via ControlNet Remote Chassis the role of the RPI and the module s COS behavior changes slightly with respect to getting data to the owner The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module will multicast data within its own chassis as described in the previous section but only the value of the RPI determines when the owner controller will receive it over the network Remote Input Module Connected Via ControlNet When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote chassis connected by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the module to multicast data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI but the control system will guarantee that the owner controller will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI Figure 2 5 Input Module in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At Least as Often
194. cheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM will protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 70 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068
195. chronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over ControlNet to establish a NUT as described in Chapter 2 You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and timestamp input data with a relative time reference i e the value of the CST of when that input data changes state IMPORTANT Because only one CST value is returned to the controller when any input point changes state it is recommended that you use timestamping on only one input point per module Table 4 4 describes the ways you can use the system clock Table 4 4 Use of timestamping Definition Timestamping for a The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input module point by Sequence of Events timestamping the input data To determine a sequence of events you must e Set the input module s communications format to CST Timestamped Input Data e Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence will occur Disable COS for all other points on the module If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS your module generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state as long as the changes do not occur within 500uS of each other If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500us of each other a single CST value is generated for all making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN
196. cise extreme caution when using this feature Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 5 2 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 1 Align circuit board with top and bottom chassis guides Printed Circuit Board 20861 M 2 Slide module into chassis until module tabs click Figure 5 2 20862 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 3 Keying the Removable Key the RTB to prevent inadvertently connecting the incorrect RTB to Terminal Block your module When the RTB mounts onto the module keying positions will match up For example if you place a U shaped keying band in position 4 on the module you cannot place a wedge shaped tab in 4 on the RTB or your RTB will not mount on the module We recommend that you use a unique keying pattern for each slot in the chassis 1 Insert the U shaped band with the longer side near the terminals Push the band onto the module until it snaps in place Figure 5 3 U shaped Keying Band 20850 M 2 Key the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module positions Insert the wedge shaped tab on the RTB with the rounded edge first Push the tab onto the RTB until it stops ma hen keying your RTB and module you must begin with a wedge shaped tab in position 6 or 7 Figure 5 4 Wedge shaped Keying Tab Module side of RTB 20851 M Preliminary Publica
197. ctions Change of state Time stamp of inputs Software configurable 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User Selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 position RTB 1756 TBNH or 1756 TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 112 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 40 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operat
198. ctor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 ndustrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 41 1756 0A16 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 16 our 1 IGOR ouT 0 IDB OUT 3 H H OUT 2 NOTES 1 Do not physical t ie E 1 Do not physically connec Group 0 OUT 5 5 OUT 4 Group 0 more than two wires to a lie ie single RTB terminal OUT 7 T i OUT 6 When you daisy chain Daisy chain t E from a group to other other RTBs L1 0 i i L2 0 RTBs always connect the ooo D I ssai daisy chain as shown ouT 9 i OUT 8 2 This wiring example IDD shows a single voltage OUT 11 i i OUT 10 source 1 Group 1 3 If separate power Group 1 OUT 13 ic ig OUT 12 sources are used do not m 7 exceed the specified OUT 15 I ie OUT 14 isolation voltage y 11 11 ES EB 12 1
199. data echo economized The information is limited to owner controller has a general faults and data single RPI value for each rack connection In traditional I O systems controllers poll input modules to obtain their input status In the ControlLogix system a controller does not poll digital input modules Instead the modules multicast their data either upon Change of State or periodically The frequency depends on the options chosen during configuration and where in the control system that input module physically resides IMPORTANT This is called the Producer Consumer model The input module is the producer of input data and the controller is the consumer of the data All ControlLogix inputs are updated asynchronous to the controller s task execution In other words an input may be updaed in the controller at any time during the controller s execution of the tasks it is configured to run The input device determines when the input is sent based on its configuration An input module s behavior also varies depending upon whether it operates in the local chassis or in a remote chassis The following sections detail the differences in data transfers between these set ups Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 10 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Input Modules in a Local Chassis When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller the following two configurati
200. dicators and 4 terminals per output 1756 0B16E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 XIMF 2 Expander with eight feed through channels 1492 IFM20D24 LED indicating Standard with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V ac dc LEDs and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F 2 Fusible Extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIMF F24 2 Expander with eight 24V dc channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM2024 8R Relay 20 pin master with eight 24V de relays 1492 XIM24 8R Expander with eight 24V de relays 1756 0B16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output 1756 OB16IS Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital I O Module F 7 Table F 1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable
201. driver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operational Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity EC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration EC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock EC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Non operating Shock Emissions EC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 3 20V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80MHz to 1000MHz EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating
202. dule wide basis Change the Input Filter settings Click Finish when the module is configured If you want to alter or view the default configuration click on Next You will be taken through a series of wizard screens that enable you to alter or view the module Although each screen maintains importance during online monitoring two of the screens that appear during this initial module configuration process are blank They are shown here to maintain the graphical integrity of RSLogix 5000 To see these screens in use see page 8 5 After the naming page multiple screens appear Depending on the module you picked in step 3 on page 6 5 the number of screens and information on each screen may vary The screens below show sample configuration screens for the 1756 IB16D module Module Properties Local 1756 IB16D 2 1 Requested Packet Interval RPIP Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Finish gt gt Help Module Properties Local 1756 IB16D 2 1 Finish gt gt Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 6 10 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configuring a Standard Table 6 4 lists the ControlLogix standard digital input modules and the Input Module Table 6 4 These input modules 1756 IA16 1756 IA16 1756 IA32 1756 IB16 1756 IB161 1756 1B32 1756 IC16
203. dules user Information ae Table Summary of Changes 1 New and Revised Information Information About Location New or Revised Event Based Tasks Chapter 2 New 1756 IA32 module Features description in Chapter 3 New Module specific information e g wiring diagram on page 7 8 1756 IG16 module Features description in Chapter 3 New Module specific information e g wiring diagram on page 7 29 1756 OB16IS module Features description in Chapter 3 New Module specific information e g wiring diagram on page 7 71 1756 0G16 module Features description in Chapter 3 New Module specific information e g wiring diagram on page 7 86 1756 OV32E module Features description in Chapter 3 New Module specific information e g wiring diagram on page 7 98 Using the Motion Axis page 3 20 New Output Cam MAOC Instructions with Time Scheduled Output Control Scheduled output data page 6 7 New per point communications format 1756 OB16IS module only Updated Chapter 7 Revised Environmental Condition Specifications Using 1492 Wiring Appendix F New Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module Glossary After Appendix E New and revised terms Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Summary of Changes 2 Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 What This Preface Contains Who Should Use This Manual Purpose of This Manual Preface
204. dules will have these agency approvals and be marked accordingly Diagnostic Latch of Information Diagnostic Latching allows diagnostic I O modules to latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 12 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch service Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch service Enable Field Power Loss detection on diagnostic digital I O modules as shown below Enable and disable diagnostic E Module Properties Local 5 1756 IB16D 2 1 latch of information on the General Connection Module Inf Diagnostics Backplane Configuration tab F Baa o on on gt ort gt Off e Check the box to enable iagnostic latch of nformation e Clear the box to disable _ iagnostic latch of nformation gt s ka lt nt zI q 4 TARAR am kukuka XIXI IV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline eT Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the I O module s power is cycled Diagnostic Timestamp Diagnostic I O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs or when it clears This feature provides greater accuracy and f
205. e load The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it is likely that the fuse will not blow and the transistor or relay associated with that channel will be damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuse should be installed externally and properly sized to match the individual load characteristics 8 certifications of this product Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 18 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Field Power Loss Detection For the standard digital output modules the Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the 1756 OA8E only When field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted Milian Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation Enable Field Power Loss detection on the 1756 OA8E module as shown below Enable and disable field power loss detection on the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8E 2 1 Diagnostics Backplane General Connect
206. e Nominal Input Voltage 24V de On State Current 2 0mA 10V de minimum OmA 30V dc maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 5V Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 3 2kQ 30V de nput Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 280us 1ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 540us 2ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of State Timestamp of Inputs Software configurable 200us Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Cyclic Update Time User selectable 1001s minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEMA clamp 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 position RTB 1756 TBNH or 1756 TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 43 Environmental Conditions
207. e s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 17 Isolated wiring L1 0 11 0 lof fl out o o 2 0 L1 1 ja 3 OUT 1 L1 2 O __ L1 2 JG je 5 OUT 2 12 2 L1 3 e 7g OUT 3 L1 4 O L1 4 Eo 9 DT our 4 _o L2 4 L1 5 E2 1 DT OUT 5 L1 6 glu 13 Z OUT 6 L1 7 16 15 4 OUT 7 Jumper bar Cut to length L1 8 118 17 K OUT 8 L1 9 19 191g OUT 9 L1 10 92 21g OUT 10 Non isolated L1 11 Dja 23 OUT 11 7 wiring L1 12 26 25 OUT 12 L1 13 l 27 DT OUT 13 L1 14 Ela 29 OUT 14 ooo L1 15 32 31N OUT 15 e L1 O 11 15 gla 33 G Not used a Not used _ 36 35 DT Not used 2 x Daisy chain to other RTBs 30244 Surge Current Chart LED indicator L1 0 20A gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST01234567 9 Z ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K on d Continuous 30 C 1a L Continuous 60 C e 0 43ms 41161 M Time 40847 M 40459 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 51 1756
208. e Status Of ae ee eee This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 25 Field Side Output Verification Field Side Output Verification informs the user that logic side instructions that the module consumes are accurately represented on the power side of a switching device In other words for each output point this feature confirms that the output is ON when it is commanded to be ON The diagnostic output module can tell a controller that it received a command and whether or not the field side device connected to the module has executed the command For example in applications that need to verify that the module has accurately followed the processor s instructions the module samples the field side state and compares it to the system side state This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A If an output cannot be verified a point level fault is sent to the controller Enable Field Side Output Verification as shown below E Module Properties Local 6 1756 OA8D 2 1 Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane General Connection Module Info a Enable and disable no load detection on th
209. e Configuration tab Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Latching e Check the box to enable no load detection e Clear the box to disable no load detection aon AAO ESKS ica ia ian ica ia iKa m Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Arri Help Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 4 26 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Pulse Test Pulse Test is a feature found on diagnostic output modules that can verify output circuit functionality without actually changing the state of the output load device A short pulse is sent to the targeted output circuit The circuit should respond as it would if a real change of state command was issued but the load device does not transition TIP Consider the following when using the Pulse Test e Only use the test when the output state does not transition for long periods of time Normal diagnostics will catch faults if the outputs are transitioning regularly e When first performing the pulse test it is recommended that you verify the load will not transition You should be at the actual load while the test is performed Table 4 12 lists how the Pulse Test can be used to perform a preemptive diagnosis of possible future module conditions Table 4
210. e Isolated RTN OUT 0 S14 3 OUT 0 a same name are wiring DC 1 To e S OUT 1 a oe pe N RTN OUT 1 e s 7 a OUT 1 e module For example 1 z the load can be ta Sy o connected to either De 3 4 D gt sue vo terminal marked OUT 0 RTN OUT 3 g le we D OUT 3 2 Do not physically connect a D D idre than two wirestoa Non isolated wiring DC 4 Tayi 18 17 5 OUT 4 single RTB terminal RTN OUT 4 epi ep anes When you daisy chain to Daisy chain to DC 5 Te 2 10 Pad other RTBs always other RTBs 7 RIN OUT 5 o sg OUT 5 connect the daisy chain e _DC 6 Jay s IG Ours as shown RTN OUT 6 9 28 27 5 OUT 6 3 If separate power ee o _DC 7 Jay 30 291g OUT 7 sources are used do not Daisy chain to RIN OUT 7 o 32 ao OUT 7 exceed the specified other RIES Not used G5 34 33 G Not used isolation voltage Not used GQ 36 35 4 Not used 0169 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator DC 0 Surge a 2 A G gt DC OUTPUT os OUT 0 3 Ne D Continuous A ST01234567 g T g RTN z 2A L 60 C K D a 8 lt ControlBus Interface __ lt Display 0 H 30347 M Time ams 40849 M 40466 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 OH8I Specifications Number of Outputs 8 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 210mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de
211. e Terminal Block RTB or a Bulletin 1492 Interface Module cable that connects to an IFM to connect all field side wiring Before you install and use your module you should have already e installed and grounded a 1756 chassis and power supply To install these products refer to the publications listed in Table Preface 3 on page Preface 3 e ordered and received an RTB or IFM and its components for your application Mitte tae RTBs and IFMs are not included with your module purchase Table 1 3 Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Catalog Description Module Specific Number Information on 1756 IA16 79 132V ac 16 point input module page 7 2 1756 1A161 79 132V ac 16 point isolated input module page 7 5 1756 1A32 74 132V ac 32 point input module page 7 8 1756 IA8D 79 132V ac 8 point diagnostic input module page 7 11 1756 IB16 10 31V de 16 point input module page 7 14 1756 IB16l 10 30V dc 16 point isolated input module page 7 20 1756 1B32 B 10 31V de 32 point input module page 7 23 1756 1016 30 60V dc 16 point input module page 7 26 1756 IG16 TTL input module page 7 29 1756 1H161 90 146V dc 16 point isolated input module page 7 32 1756 IM16l 159 265V ac 16 point isolated input module page 7 35 1756 IV16 10 31V de 16 point sourcing current input page 7 41 module The Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system
212. e complete the sections below Where applicable rank the feature 1 needs improvement 2 satisfactory and 3 outstanding Overall Usefulness 1 2 3 How can we make this publication more useful for you 2 3 Can we add more information to help you Completeness all necessary information procedure step illustration feature is provided ere example guideline other explanation definition Technical Accuracy 1 2 3 Can we be more accurate all provided information l is correct text illustration Clarity 1 2 3 How can we make things clearer all provided information is easy to understand Other Comments You can add additional comments on the back of this form Your Name Your Title Function Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments Location Phone ___No there is no need to contact me Yes please call me Yes please email me at Yes please contact me via Return this form to Rockwell Automation Technical Communications 1 Allen Bradley Dr Mayfield Hts OH 44124 9705 Fax 440 646 3525 Email RADocumentComments ra rockwell com Publication ClG C0521C EN P May 2003 PN957726 67957782 91 Other Comments PLEASE FASTEN HERE DO NOT STAPLE PLEASE FOLD HERE BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO 18235 CLEVELAND OH POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE Allen Bradley BELIANCE JB ELECTRIC ie
213. e earth CM on power ports 1 2 3 4 Use this conductor category info installation manual Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 14 Module Specific Information 1756 1B16 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 5 IN 1 ee ie IN 0 J h 4 Ei IN 3 H H IN 2 Group 0 lis Li Group 0 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name IN 5 H H IN 4 are connected together on the IG module For example DC COM Daisy chain to IN 7 1 1 can be connected to either other R
214. e enabled for the service e g If bit 0 1 for Reset Fuse then point 0 has its electronic fuse reset Results_32_ Points DINT point 0 Pass 0 Fail 1 result for the service i e If bit 0 1 for the results of the Reset Fuse then the Reset Fuse failed for Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Communications Pop Up Screen This pop up screen provides information on the path of the message instruction For example the slot number of a 1756 OA8D module distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for IMPORTANT Use the Browse button to see a list of the I O modules in the system You choose a path when you choose a module from the list You must name an I O module during initial module configuration to choose a path for your message instruction Message Configuration Slot4_Ch0_Reset_Fuse x Configuration Communication Path Slot4_0A8D Slot4_OA8D Use this Browse button to see a list such as the one displayed below Communication Method CIP DH Channel z Destination Link 4 c CE with Source Link 3 Destination Node a Octal Source ID IV Cache Connections e O Enable Enable Waiting Start O Done Done Length 0 Error Coc I Timed Out a Extended Error Code OK Cancel Apply Help Module Browser El
215. e in the future You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs you must e choose a Communications Format for each input and output module that allows timestamping For more information on choosing a Communications Format see Chapter 6 e have a controller in the same rack as both I O modules e disable Change of State for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped For scheduled outputs to work most effectively remember the following e The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for any controller backplane and network delays e The 0 modules must reside in the same rack as the timemaster For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic to use these features see page B 9 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 9 Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules remember the following conditions that may occur depending on the module s Major Revision e If the module has a Major Revision 1 it will always return a positive timestamping value e If the module has a Major Revision gt 2 it will return a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first Change of State condition occurs
216. e size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other 1756 1B32 B Module features Module Specific Information 7 23 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 My My a Do N 1 ooog Q Figure 7 8 m IN 1 IN 3 IN 5 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same at ats name are connected together on the module For f IN 11 example DC COM can be Daisy chain to IN 13 connected to either terminal other RIBS IN 15 marked GND 1 GND O 2 Do not physically connect m IN 17
217. ees b E oK Ee M BAT l No Edits a Evo I Controller Digital 10 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler SS Tasks AL Ga MainTask EB MainProgram Double click here to enter the Main Routine iS Sle After adding a message instruction to a rung you must create a tag for the message instruction r Message New us vee O O00 Cut Instruction Ctrl Copy Instruction Ctrl C 1 Right click on the question j EESE maky mark to see this End Baste i pull down menu Delete Instruction Del Add Ladder Element Altelns Edit Instruction Enter 2 Click here to Create a Tag Eqit Wen Uperend Description ErPD Remove korce GoTo Fill in the following information when the New Tag pop up screen appears IMPORTANT We suggest you name the tag to indicate what module service the message instruction is sending For example the message instruction below is used to reset an electronic fuse and the tag is named to reflect this A Name the tag Hae Siot4_Ch0_Reset_ Fuse Lo B Choose the Base tag type pesenna foe Hep C Choose the Message data type Tag Type Base C Alias D Choose the Controller scope P Produced I f consumers C Consumed IMPORTANT Message tags can only Dre MESSAGE Configure be created with the Scope Digital_l0 contro
218. el to channel isolation and no isolation Your application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use Multiple Input Point Densities ControlLogix input modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 13 Using Features Specific to Standard Output Modules Use the pulldown to set the output fault state on the Configuration tab The features described in this section are available on all ControlLogix digital output modules Configurable Point Level Output Fault States Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states either ON OFF or Last State in case of a communications failure or program mode ma henever you inhibit an output module it enters the program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs turn off during program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will turn off Set output fault state as shown below E Module Properties Local 2 1756 048 1 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Fault Mode r Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault
219. enabled and if a diagnostic fault occurs e If this feature is disabled real time data is not sent when a diagnostic fault occurs but is still sent at the specified RPI or on input COS if it is enabled Enable the diagnostic change of state as shown below E Module Properties Local 5 1756 IB16D 2 1 General Connection Module Info Diagnostics Backplane I Open Wire Enable and disable diagnostic change of state on the Configuration tab e Check the box to enable diagnostic change of state qoaa AAA lV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions e Clear the box to disable 5 S Offli diagnostic change of state ee Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Cancel Apply Help Enable and disable field power loss detection on the Configuration tab e Check the box to enable field power loss detection e Clear the box to disable field power loss detection ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 19 Field Power Loss Detection For the diagnostic input modules Field Power Loss detection is found on the 1756 IA8D module only When field power to the module is lost a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user
220. ent lt 50mA Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA 0 2V us for loads lt 50mA Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 113 4 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 94 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Op
221. er does not make a connection to the new module because of the mismatched revisions Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 6 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Table 3 3 Keying option Exact Match Table 3 3 describes the keying options available with your ControlLogix digital I O module Definiton All of the parameters listed above must match or the inserted module will reject a connection to the controller Compatible Module The Compatible Match mode allows an I O module to determine whether it can emulate the module defined in the configuration sent from the controller With ControlLogix digital 1 0 modules the module can emulate older revisions The module will accept the configuration if the configuration s major minor revision is less than or equal to the physical module s revision For example if the configuration contains a major minor revision of 1 7 the module inserted into the slot must have a firmware revision of 1 7 or higher for a connection to be made When a module is inserted with a major minor revision that is less than the revision for which the slot is configured i e the module has a revison of 1 6 and the slot is configured for a module with revision 1 8 no connection is made between the controller and the I O module Disable Keying We recommend using Compatible Match whenever possible Remember though with major revision changes the module only works
222. er selectable maximum time delay from zero cross Detects at 25V peak minimum Firmware phase locked loop 1ms Maximum Inhibit Voltage Zero crossing 25V peak Fusing Electronically fused per point Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 58 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non o
223. erating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Ratin g None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Contro
224. ers By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 5 Electronic Keying Instead of plastic mechanical backplane keys electronic keying allows the ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the various slots of a configured system During module configuration you must choose one of the following keying options for your I O module e Exact Match e Compatible Module e Disable Keying When the controller attempts to connect to and configure an I O module e g after program download the module compares the following parameters before allowing the connection and configuration to be accepted e Vendor e Product Type e Product Code e Major Revision Change that affects the module s function or RSLogix 5000 interface e Minor Revision Change that does not affect the module s function or RSLogix 5000 interface e g bug fixes The comparison is made between the keying information present in the I O module and the keying information in the controller s program This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a control system with the wrong module in the wrong slot For example if you select Exact Match and a module with revision 2 2 is placed in a location configured for a module with revision 2 4 the controll
225. es 4 15 Using Features Specific to The features described in this section are all available on all Diagnostic Input Modules ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time Your ControlLogix input module sends data in one of the ways described in Table 4 9 Table 4 9 Method of Description Sending Data Requested A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent Packet Interval to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer Change of State Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON The data will be sent at the RPI rate By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Digital input modules always send data at the RPI but only send data at a change of state if the COS feature is enabled Set the RPI rate and enable COS for specific input points as shown below E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IA16 2 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Change the RPI on the Requested Packet Interval API _10 02 ms 0 2 750 0 ms Connection tab T Inhibit Module I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IA16 2 1 Enable and disable COS on the Genera
226. essage Instructions Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration You can use ladder logic to perform run time services on your module For example page 6 19 shows how to reset an electronic fuse on the 1756 OA8D module using RSLogix 5000 This appendix provides an example of how to reset the same fuse without using RSLogix 5000 In addition to performing run time services you can use ladder logic to change configuration Chapter 6 explained how to use the RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix analog I O module Some of those parameters may also be changed through ladder logic In ladder logic you can use Message instructions to send occasional services to any ControlLogix I O module Message instructions send an explicit service to the module causing specific behavior to occur for example unlatching a high alarm Message instructions maintain the following characteristics e messages use unscheduled portions of system communications bandwidth e one service is performed per instruction e performing module services does not impede module functionality such as sampling inputs or applying new outputs Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 B 2 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Processing Real Time Control and Module Services Services sent via message instructions are not as time critical as the module behavior
227. everse Polarity Protection None If the module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 112 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 85 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Co IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Id Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Non operating Cold Non operating Dry Heat Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating
228. f the pulse test to a data storage location The actual results appear in the message instruction tags under the tag name EXERR Rung 4 performs a reset latched diagnostics service to slot 4 This example shows an output module These tags were created for this ladder logic MainProgram MainRoutine of x End 4 J AI MainRoutine Local 4 1 FuseBlown 0 Local 8 Data 1 Local 4 l FuseBlown 1 E E Type CIP Generic Message Control MSG Slot4_BO_fuse_reset Type CIP Generic E E Local 8 Data 2 E Message Control MSG Slot4_B1_fuse_reset E Type CIP Generic Message Control MSG Pulse_test_slot4_bO MO Move Local 8 1 Data 3 JE Source Dest 2 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000 Pulse_test_slot4_bO EXERR 0e Pluse_Results_Slot4 0 Message Control MSG Type CIP Generic N gt Latched_reset E N gt R gt Click on the box in each rung to see the configura ion and communication information pop up associated with it The following screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder logic as they appear in the tag editor Controller Tags Pulse_Fuse_example controller MESSAGE Slot4_BO_fuse_reset MESSAGE reset_slt4_b1 DINT Binary DINT Decimal Pulse_test_slot4_b0
229. f Events 32 Point 10 31 2 DC Input 32 Point 10V 31 2 DC Input 16 Point 30 60 DC Input 16 Channel Non Isolated Voltage Current Analog Input 4 Current Volt Inputs 2 Current Volt Qutputs Fast Analog 4 Current Volt Inputs 2 Current Volt Outputs Fast Analog 6 Channel Isolated Current Sourcing Analog Input 6 Channel Isolated Voltage Current Analog Input 4 Configure the module The first screen of the configuration wizard is shown below A Name the module Module Properties Local 1756 IB16D 2 1 B Select the module s slot number C Choose a Communications Format For more information see page 6 6 D Make sure the Minor Revision number matches the label on the side of your module E Choose an Electronic Keying method For more information see page 3 5 F If you are altering the default configuration click here Go to page 6 9 G If you are using default configuration click here Go to page 6 8 6 5 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 6 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Communications Format The communications format determines what type of configuration options are made available what type of data is transferred between the module and its owner controller and what tags are generated when configuration is complete Once a module is created you cannot change the communications format unless you delete and recreate the module The comm
230. features are described later in this section Not all the features described in this chapter are available on all ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules Table 4 2 lists which modules support each feature Table 4 2 This feature described on this page is available on these modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 4 4 Module Fault Reporting 4 4 Fully Software Configurable 4 4 Electronic Keying 4 5 Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs 4 8 Producer Consumer Model 4 10 were Status Indicator Information 4 10 all E a and Full Class Division 2 Compliance 4 11 UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV Agency Approvals 4 11 Diagnostic Latch of Information 4 11 Diagnostic Timestamp 4 12 8 Point AC 16 Point DC 4 12 Point Level Fault Reporting 4 13 Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time 4 15 Software Configurable Filter Times 4 16 Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Modules 4 16 t ee NEES diagnostic digital input modules Multiple Input Point Densities 4 16 Open Wire Detection 4 17 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 4 18 Field Power Loss Detection 4 19 1756 IA8D Configurable Point Level Output Fault States 4 20 Output Data Echo 4 21 Field Wiring Options 4 22 Multiple Output Point Densities 4 22 Fusing 4 23 No Load Detection 4 24 diagnostic digital output modules Field Side Output Verification 4 25 Pulse Test
231. ftware to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve e serial number e revision information e product code e vendor identification e error fault information e diagnostic counters By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 5 Electronic Keying Instead of plastic mechanical backplane keys electronic keying allows the ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the various slots of a configured system During module configuration you must choose one of the following keying options for your I O module e Exact Match e Compatible Module e Disable Keying When the controller attempts to connect to and configure an I O module e g after program download the module compares the following parameters before allowing the connection and configuration to be accepted e Vendor e Product Type e Product Code e Major Revision Change that affects the module s function or RSLogix 5000 interface e Minor Revision Change that does not affects the module s function or RSLogix 5000 interface e g bug fixes The comparison is made between the keying information present in the I O module and the keying information in the controller s program This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a control sy
232. g and the length of the text string in bytes You do not have to create the user defined data structure If you choose not to create this structure you can use the Ascii string and String length to retrieve and understand module identification through some interface excluding RSLogix 5000 software The screen below shows the example WHO ladder logic application who_msg EN MSG m Type CIP Generic Message Control who_msg EE rE COF COP Copy File Copy File Source WHO_Information 2 Source WHO_Information 4 Dest WHO product _type Dest WHO product_code Length 2 Length 2 COP COP Copy File Copy File Source WHO_Information 6 Source WHO_Information Dest WHO major_revision Dest WHO minor_revision Length 1 Length 1 COP Copy File Source WHO_Information 8 Dest WHO status Length 2 COP COP Copy File Copy File Source WHO_Information 0 Source WHO_Information 10 Dest WHO vendor Dest WHO serial_number Length 2 Length 4 COF COP Copy File Copy File Source WHO_Information 15 Source WHO_Information 1 4 Dest WHO ascii_string 0 Dest WHO string_length Length 32 Lenath 1 End 4 7 MainRoutine mE Use Table B 4 to understand the values returned for each rung Table B 4 Rung Values for Example WHO Ladder Logic Application Rung Destination Module Description Ide
233. g fusing see BlownFuse NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data Input data Data Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output module This is 1 bit per point used to verify proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 1 0n Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and 1 0 data for 1 bit per point that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module will be faulted 0 no fault 1 fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FuseBlown Input Data Fuse is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or overload 1 bit per point condition for an output point All FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the User 0 no fault 1 fault Output Data Tags Table A 5 Standard Output Module Output Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with Scheduled 8 bytes Outputs and Coordinated System Time CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST Timestam
234. g is disabled A controller will not establish a connection if any of the following conditions exist even if keying is disabled e The slot is configured for one module type e g input module and a module of another type e g output module is inserted in the slot e The module inserted into the slot cannot accept some portion of the configuration For example if a standard input module is inserted into a slot configured for a diagnostic input module the controller cannot make a connection because the module cannot accept process the diagnostic configuration Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 7 Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting allows you to indefinitely suspend a connection between an owner controller and an digital I O module This process can occur in either of the following ways e You write configuration for an I O module but inhibit the module to prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the owner does not establish a connection and configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited e In your application a controller already owns a module has downloaded configuration to the module and is currently exchanging data over the connection between the devices In this case you can inhibit the module and the owner controller behaves as if the connection to the module does not exist ma Whe
235. ge of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF Sms Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 11 Open Wire Detection Enabled 4 17 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Enabled 4 18 Modules Communications Format Full diagnostics input data 6 6 Figure 7 6 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same Daisy chain to name are connected together other RTBs gt 2 on the module For example DC GND O l a IN 0 COM can be connected to any Groupo GND 0 19 S IN 1 ATA Group 0 terminal marked GND 0 GND 0 19 k IN 2 5 resistor 2 Do not physically connect more GND O 7 E IN 3 than two wires to a single RTB GND 1 if 9 Iq IN 4 terminal When you daisy chain Group 1 GND 1 q ji HE IN 5 Group 1 from a group to other RTBs GND 1 1 8 E IN 6 away connect the daisy chain GND 1 O IN 7 as shown C GND 2 11 7g IN 8 3 This wiring example shows a GND 2 1 2 19 e IN 9 15KQ 1 4W single voltage source Group GND 2 gz 21 IN 10 5o rae Group 2 0 4 Resistors are not necessary if GND 2 amp 4 23 IN 11 Wire Off diagnostic is not used r GND 3 G26 25 5 If separate power sources are GND 3 928 27 used do not exceed the GND 3 ajo 29 Group 3 specified isolation voltage GND 3 Z323 IN 1 To Determine Leakage Resistor _ GND 3 9 3 g Not used P S Field side power supply Not used Not used RieakMaximum P S Voltage 4 6V dc 1 21mA ReeakMinimum P S
236. ge of State Timestamp of Inputs Software configurable 200us Short Inrush Current 390mA Change of State on Inputs Software configurable Within 200s Cyclic Update Time RPI User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 250V continuous 250V continuous Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEMA 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Conductors Wire Size Category Type 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum 2 Copper Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 10 Module Specific Information Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non conden
237. ged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 mmunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 mmunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment when produc is marked CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations CE European Un
238. h the same L2 0 o L2 0 92 19 INO 5 o olL1 0 name are connected together Isolated L2 1 o 3 IN 1 on the module For example wing L2 2 o L2 2 ge sia IN 2 o lt O oL1 2 L2 can be connected to any L2 3 Tape 71a IN 3 terminal marked L2 15 L2 4 o L2 4 To 90 N 4 o o ol1 4 2 Do not physically connect L2 5 6 h2 WD IN 5 more than two wires to a L2 6 g IKIE IN 6 single RTB terminal When L2 7 ge 15 G IN 7 you use the second L2 15 Jumper bar Cut to length L2 8 Jq yi18 17 IN 8 terminal to daisy chain to L2 9 G 20 19 IN 9 p other RTBs always connect L2 10 192 2 IN 10 o lo the daisy chain as shown L2 11 G j24 23 IN 11 3 The jumper bar part number Non isolated L2 12 j 25 IN 12 is 97739201 Contact your wiring L2 13 G 28 27 IN 13 o oe local Rockwell Automation L2 14 G 30 29 IN 14 z sales representative to order L2 15 1l 31 IN 15 o o e additional jumper bars L2 12 15 D 33D Not used if necessary P Not used C 36 35 Not used 5 4 If separate power sources are L1 used do not exceed the g specified isolation voltage Daisy chain to other RTBs 40168 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V NO 6 AC INPUT E Eaa 8 L2 0 r A AASE ie ST01234567 0 i r ST 8 9 10 1112131415 K GND 6 Control Bus Display Interface 30338 M 20941 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P
239. he I O circuits to originate on separate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual isolation or point to point isolation Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix diagnostic input modules are channel to channel isolation and no isolation Your specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use Multiple Input Point Densities ControlLogix diagnostic input modules use either 8 or 16 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Enable and disable open wire detection on the Configuration tab e Check the box to enable open wire detection e Clear the box to disable open wire detection ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 17 Open Wire Detection Open Wire is used to make sure the field wiring is connected to the module The field device must provide a minimum leakage current to function properly A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device See each module s specifications listed in Chapter 7 for more details The resulting current is then expected to exist when the input is open When an Open Wire condition is detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point fault This feature has a corresponding tag that can be exam
240. her RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown 3 This wiring example shows a single voltage source 4 f separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Module features Module Specific Information 7 83 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description 3 ControlBus Interface Display Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 28 Daisy chain to ae DC 0 ZL p OUT other RTBs ie iG UT 0 DC O HED Ff OUT 1 Group 0 Ll D 4 DC 0 WD JF OUT 2 bust IG DC 0 ZL 0 OUT 3 Pew ie RTN OUT 0 1E f RTN OUT 0 PN D Dc IE E out a DC 1 OI OUT 5 Group 1 B IB DC 1 SL I OUT 6 pa ie De i IED IGB our 7 RTN OUT 1 ED HEB RTN our 14 DC COM 40182 M Surge Current Chart LED indicator DC 0 Surge a DC OUTPUT OUT 0 D Continuous 3 RTN Eon 7 etm gt
241. ibes devices compatible with ControlLogix I O and features that are specific to various modules Table 4 1 Determining Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 4 1 Determining Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 4 2 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 4 4 Modules Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 4 15 Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 4 20 Fault and Status Reporting Between Diagnostic Input Modules and 4 30 Controllers Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controller 4 32 Determining Diagnostic ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect whether they are ON or OFF Input Module Compatibility ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON OFF signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Typical input devices include e proximity switches e limit switches e selector switches e float switches e pushbutton switches Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 2 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules you must consider e the voltage necessary for your application e whether you need a solid state device e current leakage e if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix input
242. iguration for that module In the example below Controller A and Controller B have both been configured to be the owner controller of the input module Figure 2 8 Multiple Owners with Identical Configuration Data Initial Configuration gt Controller A Input e Con rollerB Initial Configuration oal e Bo Input Module aUa S Input Module Configuration Configuration Data Data XXXXX ConA on B XXXXX XXXXX a A XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX nd 9 41056 As soon as a controller receives its user program it will try to establish a connection with the input module Whichever controllers configuration data arrives first establishes a connection When the second controller s data arrives the module compares it to its current configuration data the data received and accepted from the first controller If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the data sent by the first controller that connection is also accepted If any parameter of the second configuration data is different from the first the module rejects the connection and the user is informed by an error in the software or programatically via a ladder logic program The advantage of multiple owners over a Listen mode connection is that now either of the controllers can break the connection to the module and the module will continue to operate and multicast data to the system because of the connection maintained by the other contr
243. ined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A m this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation Set open wire detection as shown below E Module Properties Local 5 1756 IB16D 2 1 Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 18 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled a diagnostic input module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events described in Table 4 10 occurs Table 4 10 If this option is selected Requested Packet Interval The input module sends data to the owner controller at a user defined rate Change of State when a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON The transitioned input data is sent with the next RPI update Diagnostic Change of State when any change in the diagnostics for an input module occurs Although the RPI occurs continuously the diagnostic COS feature allows you to decide whether changes in a module s diagnostic detection should cause the module to send real time data to the owner controller e If this feature is enabled the input module sends new data to the owner controller at the RPI on input COS if it is
244. ing Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when produc is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6
245. iocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions TTL outputs are inverted 0 to 0 4V dc low voltage True On Use a NOT instruction in your program to convert to traditional True High logic 2 3 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other 1756 OH8I Module features Module Specific Information 7 89 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 30 7 i L__pe 0 a 2 114 OUT 0 NOTES 1 All terminals with th
246. ion Module Into Enable Diag Latching e Check the box to enable field power loss detection e Clear the box to disable field power loss detection kakalia lika likai ika rm Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Enable and disable diagnostic latch of information on the Configuration tab e Check the box to enable ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 19 Diagnostic Latch of Information For the standard digital I O modules the Diagnostic Latch of Information feature is found on the 1756 OA8E module only Diagnostic Latching allows this module to latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch service Enable Field Power Loss detection on the 1756 OA8E module as shown below E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8E 2 1 General Connection Module Info Diagnostics Backplane Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss Enable Diag Latching diagnostic latch of information e Clear the box to disable _ diagnostic latch of information
247. ion 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 34 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about What s Next determining input module compatibility determining output module compatibility using features common to ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules using features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules using features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Chapter 5 explains Installing the ControlLogix I O Module Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Chapter 5 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes how to install ControlLogix modules For information about See page Installing the ControlLogix I O Module 5 1 Keying the Removable Terminal Block 5 3 Connecting Wiring 5 4 Assembling The Removable Terminal Block and 5 8 the Housing Choosing the Extended Depth Housing 5 9 Installing the Removable Terminal Block 5 11 Removing the Removable Terminal Block 5 13 Removing the Module from the Chassis 5 14 Installing the ControlLogix You can install or remove the module while chassis power is applied l 0 Module The module is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exer
248. ion 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 instal 3 4 certifi Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 lation manual cation details Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 17 1756 IB16D Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Chan
249. ision 1 it will always return a positive timestamping value e If the module has a Major Revision gt 2 it will return a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first Change of State condition occurs Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the controller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 10 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Producer Consumer Model By using the Producer Consumer model ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without having been polled by a controller first The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example a diagnostic input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another processor For a more detailed explanation of this process see Chapter 2 Status Indicator Information Each ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O module has an LED indicator on the front of the module that allows you to check the module health and operational status of a module The LED displays vary for
250. it Tags uy Because the process of viewing and changing a module s configuration tags is broader in scope than can be addressed in this chapter you must turn to Appendix A for more information and sample tag collections In this chapter you learned about e configuring ControlLogix digital I O modules e configuration tags e editing module configuration Chapter 7 lists Module Specific Information Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Chapter Module Specific Information What This Chapter Contains This chapter provides module specific information for all ControlLogix digital modules The information is separated by module and includes a list of configurable functions wiring diagrams LED indicators simplified schematics e surge currents when applicable The following tables list where module specific information can be found Table 7 1 ControlLogix input modules ControlLogix output modules For module Refer to For module Refer to 1756 1A16 7 2 1756 0A16 7 47 1756 1A161 7 5 1756 0A16l 7 50 1756 1A32 7 8 1756 0A8 7 53 1756 IA8D 7 11 1756 OA8D 7 56 1756 IB16 7 14 1756 OA8E 7 59 1756 IB16D 7 17 1756 OB16D 7 62 1756 IB16l 7 20 1756 0B16E 7 65 1756 IB32 B 7 23 1756 0B16l 7 68 1756 1C16 7 26 1756 OB16IS 7 71 1756 IG16 7 29 1756 0B32 7 74 1756 1H161 7 32 1756 OB8 7 11 1756
251. ith RSLogix 5000 versions 9 and earlier and RSLogix 5000 versions 10 and greater Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Configuration Pop Up Screen B 5 This pop up screen provides information on what module service to perform and where to perform it For example you must use this screen to reset an electronic fuse module service on channel 0 of a 1756 OA8D module where to perform service RSLogix 5000 version 9 and earlier Configuration Communication Message Type CIP Generic X Service Code fad Hex Source Slot4_ChO_R eset_Fuse z Object Type fi e Hex Num Of Elements fi Bytes Object ID fi Destination Local4 C fw Object Attribute Hex Create Tag O Enable Enable Waiting O Start Done Done Length 0 O Error Code I Timed Gut Extended Error Code Cancel Apply Help Message Configuration Slot4_Ch0_Reset_Fuse Lx RSLogix 5000 version 10 and greater Configuration Communication Tag CIP Generic hal Message Type rae Reset Electronic Fuse Source Element x ie Reset Electronic Fuse DOETE jute 9 Source lenat 4 Bytes Reset Latched Diagnostics I SHIRE EUs fi j Reset Latched Diagnostics 0 Destination a Retrieve CST information Set Attribute Single Fd Unlatch All Alarms I Unlatch All Alarms 0 f
252. ithout appropriate precautions there may be potential difficulties ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in other environments due to conducted as well as radiated disturbance This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications See NEMA Standards publication 250 and IEC publication 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Also see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the Allen Bradley publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for additional installation requirements pertaining to this equipment Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 1 8 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter Summary and In this chapter you read about What s Next e what ControlLogix digital I O modules are e types of ControlLogix digital I O modules Chapter 2 explains Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System
253. ix 5000 versions 9 or earlier some services require multiple parameters tags in the source and destination fields e g Pulse Test These services use copy instructions to move the multiple tags to from the message instruction source destination tags Table B 2 lists the copy instruction parameters need for these services Table B 2 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Versions 9 and Earlier Source Destination Tag in MSG Instruction Pulse_Test_Parameters SINT 10 CST_Information SINT 20 Description Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from generic source destination buffers Source Destination Length bytes Determines which point to perform the pulse test on Enable_32_points Pulse_Test_Parameters 0 4 Each bit corresponds to a point Only test one point at DINT a time Determines maximum pulse width of the pulse test in Pulse_Width Pulse_Test_Parameters 4 2 ms Pulse test inverts state of the output up to the INT maximum specified time Units are in 100us increments Default tag value 2ms i e 20 For AC modules only this specifies how long to delay Zero_Cross_Delay Pulse_Test_Parameters 6 2 after the zero cross before performing the pulse test INT Optimum time to perform pulse test is at its peak AC voltage Units are in 100us increments Default tag value 4ms i e 40 Specifies how long to wait after the
254. jumper bar part number DC 15 Ola 31 OUT 15 output is 97739201 Contact your i wiring fecal Rerkwel Automat DCH o pc 15 ID s4 33D Not used SPASA E A Sa Not used Dls 359 Not used Q sales representative to order l i DC additional jumper bars if necessary Aa 5 If separate power sources are Daisy chain to other RTBs 30242 M used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator fa ee G gt DC OUTPUT 5V 3 l oA Continuous 30 C Se eee y as T ST 8 9 101112131415 K ilies 2 Continuous 60 C 6 S lt Control Bus Interface a lt Display Time 10ms 40457 M 30182 M 40849 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 OB16IS Specifications Number of Outputs 16 individually isolated Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 350mA 5 1V de amp 2 5mA 24V de 1 8W Total backplane power Maximum Power Dissipation 3 6W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 12 28 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V de Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 30 C 1A maximum 60 C Linear derating Per Module 8A maximum 30 C 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Surge Current Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 2s Minimum Load Current 1mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 2V de 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current
255. l Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Config uration tab Enable Change of State a put Fitter Time Point Off gt r On gt Off gt On On gt Off On Off l g e Check the box to enable v M COS for a point K 7 e Clear the box to disable P r COS for a point ca 7 7 o v Status Offline Cancel amw He For a more detailed explanation of these features see page 2 10 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 4 16 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Use the pulldown to set the input filter times on the Configuration tab Software Configurable Filter Times ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix diagnostic input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules Set filter times as shown below E Module Properties Local 5 1756 IB16D 2 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Enable Change of State Enable Diagnostics forj M Off on V On gt off M Open Wire AISIIIAINIZI qaaa ANNA Status Offline Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Modules ControlLogix diagnostic input modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options Some applications require power for t
256. l Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n i 2 3 4 5 The commutating dv dt of the ou put voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded resistor may be added across the IEV R At 50mA and above the be sure it is rated for the power tl range the L1 AC waveform could or flattened sections he TI mod hat i output and L2 The purpose o be at fault Be sure the wave RIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA ule has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 will dissipate P V 2 R If the com
257. l Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n Zone 2 EC 61000 4 5 i 1 2 3 4 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category info installation manual mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 20 Module Specific Information 1756 1B161 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figu
258. le of another type e g output module is inserted in the slot e The module inserted into the slot cannot accept some portion of the configuration For example if a standard input module is inserted into a slot configured for a diagnostic input module the controller cannot make a connection because the module cannot accept process the diagnostic configuration Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 7 Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting allows you to indefinitely suspend a connection between an owner controller and an digital I O module This process can occur in either of the following ways e You write configuration for an I O module but inhibit the module to prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the owner does not establish a connection and configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited e In your application a controller already owns a module has downloaded configuration to the module and is currently exchanging data over the connection between the devices In this case you can inhibit the module and the owner controller behaves as if the connection to the module does not exist ma Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters the program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the out
259. les 4 31 4 32 Standard input modules 3 21 Standard output modules 3 22 3 23 Module Identification Information B 13 Retrieving 3 4 4 4 module identification information 1 5 ASCII text string 1 5 catalog code 1 5 major revision 1 5 minor revision 1 5 product type 1 5 serial number 1 5 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 status 1 5 vendor ID 1 5 WHO service 1 5 Module Services In ladder logic B 2 Module Status Retrieving B 13 module status retrieving 1 5 Module Tags Accessing in RSLogix 5000 6 20 Diagnostic input modules A 5 Diagnostic output modules A 8 Standard input modules A 1 Standard output modules A 3 Module Specific Information 1756 IA16 7 2 1756 IA16 7 5 1756 IA32 7 8 1756 IA8D 7 11 1756 IB16 7 14 1756 IB16D 7 17 1756 IB161 7 20 1756 IB32 7 23 1756 IC16 7 26 1756 IH161 7 32 1756 IM161 7 35 1756 IN16 7 38 1756 IV16 7 41 1756 IV32 7 44 1756 OA16 7 47 1756 OA161 7 50 1756 048 7 53 1756 OA8D 7 56 1756 OA8E 7 59 1756 0B16D 7 62 1756 OB16E 7 65 1756 0B161 7 68 1756 0B32 7 74 1756 OB8 7 77 1756 OB8EI 7 80 1756 OC8 7 83 1756 OH8 7 89 1756 ON8 7 92 1756 OV16E 7 95 1756 OW16l 7 101 1756 OX8 7 104 module specific Information 1756 IG16 7 29 module specific information 1756 0G16 7 86 Multiple Owners Of input modules 2 19 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 NEMA Clamp RTB 5 6 Network Update Time NUT Glossary 3 for ControlNet 2 3 No Load
260. lexibility in running applications Modules use the ControlLogix system clock from a local controller to generate timestamps To use diagnostic timestamps you must choose the appropriate Communications Format during initial configuration For more information on choosing a Communications Format see Chapter 6 8 Point AC 16 Point DC Diagnostic ControlLogix digital I O modules provide various grouping of points on different modules The 8 point AC modules and 16 point DC modules provide additional flexibility when designing module applications Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 13 Point Level Fault Reporting Diagnostic I O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred on a point by point basis The following fault conditions generate their own unique fault bits Table 4 6 Unique Fault Bits for 1 0 Points Conditions Setting a Fault Bit Input Points Open wire Field power loss 1756 IA8D only Output Points Fuse blown No load Output verify Field power loss 1756 IA8D only Using these bits in tandem with data echo and manually performing a pulse test can help to further isolate the fault Table 4 7 lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OA8D module Table 4 7 1756 OA8D Diagnostic Fault Table Ladder Commands the Output to be ON Ladder Commands Output to be OFF Possible Cause of Fault
261. lication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 55 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line l ne DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 500V line line DM and 1kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wa
262. ling the Removable Terminal Block 5 11 Removing the Removable Terminal Block 5 13 Removing the Module from the Chassis 5 14 Chapter Summary and What s Next 0 5 14 Chapter 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix What This Chapter Contains y 4 p20 4 04 dees hada bd 4 6 1 Digital 1 0 Modules Configuring Your I O Module naana sve ee eae oie ke 6 1 RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software 6 2 Overview of the Configuration Process 6 2 Creating a New Module ono ws uu aaa 6 4 Communications Format osaa aaaea 6 6 Electronic Keying nw he B84 a 6 8 Using the Default Configuration 0 62 dats w sacle ae 6 8 Altering the Default Conmmouren s cies see eae 6 9 Configuring a Standard Input Module 6 10 Configuring a Standard Output Module 6 11 Configuring a Diagnostic Input Module 6 12 Configuring a Diagnostic Output Module 6 13 Editing Configuration ec6 5 6 264006 oS od bre eR ae ad 6 14 Configuring I O Modules in a Remote Chassis 6 16 Input Online Services a 1 2 5 x Meee ein a 6 18 Output Online Services vols eke ale bp gab eh wets wr ee 6 19 Viewing and Changing Module Tags 6 20 Chapter Summary and What s Next sc Saree iw 4 6 20 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information Table of Contents 5 Chapter
263. ller Controller Scope Style Pa Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 B 4 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Enter Message Configuration After creating a new tag you must enter message configuration i 0 Type Unconfigured _ lt EN gt Click here to see the message Message Conto _Slot4_ChO_Reset_Fugee lt DIO L lt ER gt configuration pop up screens End Enter message configuration on the following screens e Configuration Pop Up Screen e Communications Pop Up Screen A description of the purpose and set up of each screen follows IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 version 10 and greater the message configuration screens changed significantly to make it easier for you to configure you messages e For example in version 9 and earlier depending on the Message Type you are required to configure some combination of the following Service Code Object Type Object ID Object Attribute Source Number of Elements Destination e In version 10 and greater however after you choose a Service Type RSLogix 5000 fills in most of the fields listed above The fields you must fill in are dependent on what Service Type you choose For example with the Reset Electronic Fuse service you must only know the Source Element and the Destination The following sections show how to configure messages w
264. llowing table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 33 Daisy chain to Daisy chain to other RTBs other RTBs our 1 1 2 1 Ql our o OUT 3 qs 3 OUT 2 OUT 5 ge 5 OUT 4 Group 0 OUT 7 Dp 7 OUT 6 Group 0 NOTES 1 When you daisy chain from a OUT 9 o 9 G OUT 8 group to another RTB always OUT 1 g h2 1 g OUT 1 oy aca OUT 1 a ha 13 1G OUT 1 ermina directly connecte to the outi ee 1s OUT 1 supply wire as shown above RTN OUT 0 2 This wiring example uses a single a jte KEE UT voltage source OUT 1 CG 20 19 OUT 1 3 If separate power sources are OUT 1 jz 21 1G OUT 1 used do not exceed the specified OUT 2 G 24 23 QUT 2 isolation voltage OUT 2 E2 25 OUT 2 4 Do not physically connect more Group 1 OUT 2 G28 27 OUT 2 ap m VY han two wires to a single RTB OUT 2 ga 29 a OUT 2 erminal OUT 2 g2 31 1G OUT 2 OUT 3 G 34 33 G OUT
265. ltMode if comm failure Input Data Tags Table A 9 Diagnostic Output Module Input Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input data 8 bytes including fusing see BlownFuse NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data Input data Data Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output module This is 1 bit per point used to verify proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 1 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and 1 0 data for 1 bit per point that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor 0 no fault 1 fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FieldPwrLoss Input Data Field Power Loss AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed or is 1 bit per point disconnected from the module No Load will also be detected 0 no fault 1 fault Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 A 10 Tag Definitions Table A 9 Diagno
266. m Number of Motor Starters To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used by any 1756 digital I O module refer to the example in Table D 4 Table D 4 Step 1 Choose your motor starter Value Used in this Example Allen Bradley Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V ac 60Hz 2 3 Poles Inrush 1225VA Sealed 45VA N Determine the number of Motor starters required for your application 12 size 3 motor starters Se Choose a ControlLogix digital output module 1756 0A16 e Output voltage 74 265V ac e Output steady state current per point 2A maximum 30 C e amp 1A maximum 60 C Linear derating e Qutput steady state current per module 5A maximum 30 C amp 4A maximum 60xC Linear derating e Qutput surge current per point 20A maximum for 43mS repeatable every 2S 60 C 4 Determine the maximum environmental operating temperature on Confirm the voltage Range is within the Motor starter range 50 C Motor Starter uses 120V ac 1756 0A16l operates in a 74 to 120V ac voltage range o Confirm the inrush current per point Inrush of motor starter Line voltage Inrush current 1225VA 120V ac 10 2Amps Inrush The 1756 0A16l allows 20A Inrush current from above specification at 60 C nl Confirm the steady state point current of the module can drive the motor starter Sealed Line voltage Steady state current 45VA 120V ac 0 3754 50
267. marked CSA CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick 4 Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n when conformal coated FM cel4 EEx Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 ndustrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 107 Chapter Summary and In this eth about module e information Move to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Your Module What
268. mestamp on inputs Off state leakage current 1 2mA minimum 1ms Software configurable 200us Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operational Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 19 Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Hu
269. midity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity EC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industria
270. mmend the connection be inhibited To prevent other owners from receiving potentially erroneous data as described above the following steps must be followed when changing a module s configuration in a multiple owner controller scenario while online 1 For each owner controller inhibit the controller s connection to the module either in the software on the Connection tab or the pop up screen warning of the multiple owner controller condition 2 Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software For detailed information on using RSLogix 5000 to change configuration see Chapter 6 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all owner controllers making the exact same changes in all controllers 4 Disable the Inhibit box in each owner s configuration Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 21 Chapter Summary and In this chapter you read about What s Next ownership and connections direct connections e rack connections e input module operation output module operation Chapter 3 explains the ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 22 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Chapter 3 What This Chapter Contains Determining Input Module Compatibility ControlLogix Standard Digital
271. mode that requires the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor catalog number major revision and minor revision Field side Interface between user field wiring and I O module Inhibit A ControlLogix process that allows you to configure an I O module but prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the controller behaves as if the I O module does not exist at all Interface module IFM A module that uses prewired cable to connect wiring to an I O module Listen only connection An I O connection where another controller owns provides the configuration and data for the module Major revision A module revision that is updated any time there is a functional change to the module Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Glossary 3 Minor revision A module revision that is updated any time there is a change to the module that does not affect its function or interface Multicast Data transmissions which reach a specific group of one or more destinations Multiple owners A configuration set up where multiple owner controllers use exactly the same configuration information to simultaneously own an input module Network update time NUT The smallest repetitive time interval in which the data can be sent on a ControlNet network The NUT ranges from 2ms to 100ms Owner controller The controller that creates and stores the primary co
272. more than two wires to a IN 19 single RTB terminal When IN 21 you daisy chain to other IN 23 RTBs always connect the Group 1 IN 25 daisy chain as shown IN 27 3 This wiring example shows IN 29 a single voltage source IN 31 4 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic 5V IN 0 GND 0 YK CT E 3 4 GND gt ControlBus Interface 40172 M LED indicator N 6 DC INPUT ST 01234567 8 111111 ST89 012345 k gp 11112222 C 67890123 8 gt 22 222233 45678901 Display 30183 M 30082 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 1B32 B Specifications Number of Inputs 32 16 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 120mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Backplane Power 0 66W Maximum Power Dissipation Module 6 2W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 21 1 BTU hr 60 C On State Voltage Range 10 31 2V de Nominal Input Voltage 24V de ON State Current 10V de 2 0mA 31 2V de 5 5mA Maximum Off State Voltage 5V de Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 5 67kQ 31 2V de Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 480s nominal 1ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 420us 2ms maximum Input
273. mum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 79 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Co IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Id Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Non operating Cold Non operating Dry Heat Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged 50g shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz from 30MHz to 1000MHz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted R
274. mutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA orm is a good sinusoid void if any anomalies such as distorted Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category installation manual Refer to pub information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level ication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 95 1756 OV16E NOTES 1 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown 2 This wiring example shows a single voltage source 3 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage 4 f separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Display Optoisolation ph Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 Output data Ou
275. n n when conformal coated 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual Use this conductor category info mation fo r planning conductor routing as described in the system level 3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 4 certification details See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 104 Module Specific Information 1756 OX8I Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 35 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same T name are connected together 1 0 E OUT O N C y on the module For example L1 0 D2 1g SN Eei i o L2 0 L1 0 can be connected to either Isolated O a _ 124 3 g ni ve F Dis 5k 1 NC erminal marked L1 0 wiring TE z
276. nals for inputs 1492 IFM20F F120A 4 Fusible Isolated with 4 terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for inputs 1756 IB16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 LED indicating Standard with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V ac dc LEDs and extraterminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for inputs Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Using 1492 Wiring System s with Your Digital 1 0 Module F 3 Table F 1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable ae Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 IB16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 4 terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 Fusible Isolated with 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per input 1756 IB16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 4 terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 Fusible Isolated 24V ac dc blown fuse i
277. nd 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors Wire Size Category 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum 4 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operational Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 22 Module Specific Information Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000
278. nd _ 1492 CABLExW x cable length 4 terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 OV16E 1756 OV32E Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital I O Module F 9 Table F 1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable catalog n mber Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 0W16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 LED indicating Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Isolated with 120V ac LEDs and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output 1756 OX8I 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 LED indica
279. nd the Producer of the data echo Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Output Modules in a Local Chassis Output Modules in a Remote Chassis Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 15 The owner controller updates ControlLogix output modules in the local chassis at the end of every task and at the RPI When you specify an RPI value for a digital output module you instruct the owner controller when to broadcast the output data to the module If the module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller the module receives the data almost immediately after the owner controller sent it backplane transfer times are small AA A Owner controller Output module a J i Figure 2 6 000 I I I the end of every task and at t a es ea Data sent from owner controller at he RP Oooo 2 40949 Depending on the value of the RPI with respect to the length of the program scan the output module can receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan If an output module physically resides in a chassis other than that of the owner controller i e a remote chassis connected via ControlNet the owner controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate specified Updates are not performed at the end of the
280. ndicators and 4 terminals per input 1756 IB32 B 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM40D24 LED indicating Standard with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 IFM40D24A 2 24V ac dc LEDs and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM40D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V ac dc LEDs for inputs 1756 IC16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1756 1G16 1756 IH16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FS120A 4 Fusible Isolated with 120V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per input 1756 IM16l 1492 IFM40DS240A 4 Led indicating Isolated with 240V ac LEDs and 4 1492 CABLExY x cable length terminals per output 1756 IN16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 1492 IFM20D24N 1492 IFM20D24A 2 1492 IFM20D24 3 LED indicating Standard with 24V ac dc LEDs Narrow standard with 24V ac dc LEDs 24V ac dc LEDs and extraterminals for inputs 3 wire sensor with 24V ac dc LEDs 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V ac dc blown fuse indicators for inputs Preliminary Pu
281. near derating 60V de Nominal Input Voltage 48V de On State Current 2mA 30V dc minimum 7mA 60V dc maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 10V Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 8 57kQ Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 1ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 4ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of state Time stamp of inputs Software configurable 200us Cyclic Update Time User selectable 200us minimum 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection Yes Maximum Inrush Current 250mA Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Tes
282. never you inhibit an output module it enters the program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs go to zero 0 during program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will go to zero 0 The following examples are instances where you may need to use module inhibiting e Multiple controllers own the same digital input module A change is required in the module s configuration however the change must be made to the program in all controllers In this case you can a Inhibit the module b Change configuration in all controllers c Unihibit the module e You want to FLASH upgrade an digital I O module We recommend you a Inihibit the module b Perform the upgrade c Uninhibit the module e You are using a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet but you do not want the controller to continually look for a module that does not exist yet In this case you can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 8 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs Controllers generate a 64 bit Coordinated System Time CST for their respective chassis The CST is a chassis specific time that is not syn
283. nfiguration and communication connection to a module Program Mode In this mode the following events occur e Controller program is not executing e Inputs are still actively producing data e Outputs are not actively controlled and go to their configured program mode Rack connection An I O connection where the 1756 CNB module collects digital I O words into a rack image to conserve ControlNet connections and bandwidth Rack optimization A communications format in which the 1756 CNB module collects all digital I O words in the remote chassis and sends them to controller as a single rack image Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Glossary 4 Remote connection An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules in a remote chassis Removal and insertion under power RIUP ControlLogix feature that allows a user to install or remove a module or RTB while power is applied Removable Terminal Block RTB Field wiring connector for I O modules Requested packet interval RPI The maximum amount of time between broadcasts of I O data Run mode In this mode the following events occur e Controller program is executing e Inputs are actively producing data e Outputs are actively controlled Service A system feature that is performed on user demand such as fuse reset or diagnostic latch reset System side Backplane side of the interface to the I O module
284. nfiguring 1 0 Modules in a Remote Chassis 6 16 Input Online Services 6 18 Output Online Services 6 19 Viewing and Changing Module Tags 6 20 Configuring Your 1 0 You must configure your module upon installation The module will not work until it has been configured Module j a This chapter focuses on configuring I O modules in a local chassis To configure I O modules in a remote chassis you must follow all the detailed procedures with two additional steps To see the additional steps see page 6 16 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 2 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software Use RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration for your ControlLogix digital I O module You have the option of accepting default configuration for your module or writing point level configuration specific to your application Both options are explained in detail including views of software screens in this chapter Overview of the When you use the RSLogix 5000 software to configure a ControlLogix Configuration Process digital I O module you must perform the following steps 1 Create a new module 2 Accept the default configuration or change it to specific configuration for the module 3 Edit configuration for a module when changes are needed Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 shows an overview of the configuration process Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Co
285. nfiguring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 3 Figure 6 1 Click on the Next Button to Set Specific Configuration New Module 1 Select a module from the list 2 Choose a Major Revision Naming Screen Name Description Slot number Comm format Click on the Finish Button to Minor revision Use Default Configuration gt FINISH NEXT Series of Application Make custom ae e creens configuration choices here Edit a module s configuration here Configuration complete Pop up menu leads to a module s configuration properties a A series of tabs in RSLogix 5000 provide access to change a module s configuration data p 41058 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 4 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Creating a New Module If you are not offline use this pull down menu to go offline A Right click on 1 0 Configuration B Click New Module After you have started RSLogix 5000 and created a controller you must create a new module The wizard allows you to create a new module and write configuration You can use default configuration or write specific configuration for your application IMPORTANT In RSLogix 5000 version 13 and earlier you must be offline when you create a new module 1 If necess
286. nformation 1756 OB8El NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example the load can be connected to either terminal marked OUT 0 2 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain as shown 3 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description ControlBus Interface Display Output Device Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 Output data Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 27 x DC 0 lz ng OUT 0 isolated ___RTNOUT O Aet 3 OUT 0 wiring DC 1 Taye sk OUT 1 7 RTN OUT 1 ole 7 OUT 1 lL L__p0 2 Haho olg OUT 2 _g gt ___R
287. ng Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 112 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 37 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shoc 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operati IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non opera Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat ng Cold ing Thermal Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non opera 5 to 95 non condensing ing Damp Heat Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radi
288. ng RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operational Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 7 Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on powe
289. nline module configuration change Click OK 5 Save the project 6 When prompted as shown below upload tag values Click Yes Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 16 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configuring 1 0 Modules in a Remote Chassis A Right click on 1 0 Configuration B Click New Module ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules 1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR or the EtherNet IP Bridge module 1756 ENBT are required to communicate with I O modules in a remote chassis You must configure the communications module in the local chassis and the remote chassis before adding new I O modules to the program 1 Configure a communications module for the local chassis This module handles communications between the controller chassis and the remote chassis fs RSLogix 5000 Digital_10 1756 L63 Eile Edit View Search Logic Communicatio aaa a Fle ae Offline D F RUN No Forces b Eer 7 No Edits a meee Controller Digital_I0 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler G Power Up Handler 5S Tasks E fa MainT ask E G MainProgram Unscheduled Programs 5 6 Motion Groups G Ungrouped Axes Trends 5 6 Data Types Gi User Defined H E Strings H E Predefined Ga Module Defined New Module tot ls Copy Cys RESE mik Biker 2 Choose a communications module 1756 CNB 1756 CN
290. nt 2mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V de 2A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF ims maximum 2ms maximum Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Not protected Fused IFM will protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 However the Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maxi
291. ntification Retrieved Rung 1 Product Type Module s product type Catalog Code 7 Digital 1 0 10 Analog 1 0 Module s catalog number Rung 2 Major Revision Module s major revision Minor Revision Module s minor revision Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration B 15 Table B 4 Rung Values for Example WHO Ladder Logic Application Rung Destination Module Description Identification Retrieved Rung3 Status Module s status Multiple bits listed Bit 0 0 Unowned 1 Owned Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 0 Unconfigured 1 Configured Bit 3 Reserved Bits 7 4 Forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status 0 Self Test 1 Flash update in progress 2 Communications fault 3 Not owned outputs in prog mode 4 unused 5 Internal fault need flash update 6 Run mode 7 Program mode output mods only Bit 8 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 9 0 No fault 1 Minor unrecoverable fault Bit 10 0 No fault 1 Major recoverable fault Bit 11 0 No fault 1 Major unrecoverable fault Bits 15 12 Unused Rung 4 Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor 1 Serial Number Allen Bradley Module serial number Rung5 Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module s text string ASCII Text String Module s ASCII text string description Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P Octobe
292. ntrol Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions I The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA or flattened sections 2 3 installation manual 4 5 certification details l V R At 50mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv
293. ntrolLogix backplane The backplane connector interface for the ControlLogix connector system connects the module to the ControlBus backplane Connector pins input output power and grounding connections are made to the module through these pins with the use of an RTB or IFM Locking tab The locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM cable on the module maintaining wiring connections Slots for keying Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent inadvertently making the wrong wire connections to your module Status indicators Indicators display the status of communication module health and input output devices Use these indicators to help in troubleshooting Top and bottom guides Guides provide assistance in seating the RTB or IFM cable Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 onto the module Using Module Identification and Status Information What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 5 Each ControlLogix I O module maintains specific identification information that separates it from all other modules This information assists you in tracking all the components of your system For example you can track module identification information to be aware of exactly what modules are located in any ControlLogix rack at any time While retrieving module identity you can also retrieve the module s status Each module maintains the following information Table 1 5 Module Identification and Status Information
294. nts that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A Enable Field Power Loss Detection as shown below fl Module Properties Local 6 1756 OA8D 2 1 M M M D M M C ia 7 r M D DO m O C C pr m Z C F d a zl d v C F d Off ott X Vv Vv Vv Vv iramae atone as Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help For an example of how to enable the Field Power Loss detection diagnostic see page 6 12 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 30 Fault and Status Reporting Between Diagnostic Input Modules and Controllers ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled a diagnostic output module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events described in Table 4 13 occurs Table 4 13 If this option is selected Receipt of Output Data The output module sends data to the owner controller when the output module echoes data back to the owner controller Diagnostic Change of State when any
295. of an overload on an output channel be damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuses should be externally installed None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources For voltages above 132V ac the IFMs are not an acceptable means to provide external fusing You must use a rated terminal block for the Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices ion for the module from short circuit conditions The protectio hannel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has If a short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module s group the entire group is turned off intended application n is based on a thermal cut out A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of 2 fuses The fuses are designed to protect the module from short circuit conditions The fuse does not it is likely that the fuse will not blow and the output device associated with that channel will The recommended fuse for this module has been sized to provide short circuit protection for wiring only to external loads In the event of a short circuit on an output h that channel will be damaged and the module should be replaced or a spare output channel used for th
296. oller Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 20 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners You must be careful when changing an input module s configuration data in a multiple owner controller scenario When the configuration data is changed in one of the owners for example Controller A and sent to the module that configuration data is accepted as the new configuration for the module Controller B will continue to listen unaware that any changes have been made in the module s behavior Figure 2 9 Multiple Owners with Changed Configuration Data in a Single Controller Initial Configuration Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX 22722 XXXXX gt Controller A _ Input E Controller B nitial Configuration oO E m g am 2 san aie Input Module Configuration Data i eon A Con B XXXXX O XXXXX XXXXX fall T lo Controller B is unaware of changes made by Controller A bia IMPORTANT A pop up screen in RSLogix 5000 alerts you to the possibility of a multiple owner controller situation and allows you to inhibit the connection before changing the module s configuration When changing configuration for a module with multiple owners we reco
297. on is made between the controller and the I O module We recommend using Compatible Match whenever possible Remember though with major revision changes the module only works to the level of the configuration For example if a slot is configured for a module with major minor revision of 1 7 and you insert a module with a major minor revision of 2 3 the module works at the 1 7 level with respect to module functions that are related to RSLogix 5000 such as interface changes However bug fixes that are affected by the module s firmware would work at the 2 3 revision level If possible we suggest you make sure configuration is updated to match the revision levels of all I O modules Failure to do so may not prevent the application from working but may defeat the purpose of upgrading your modules revision levels Disable Keying The inserted module attempts to accept a connection to the controller regardless of its type ATTENTION Be extremely cautious when using the disable keying option if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss If keying is disabled a controller makes a connection with most modules of the same type as that used in the slot configuration For example if a slot is configured for a 1756 IA16l standard input module and a 1756 IB16 standard input module is inserted into the slot the controller established a connection because keyin
298. on parameters will affect how and when an input module multicasts data e Requested Packet Interval RPD e Change of State COS Requested Packet Interval RPI This interval specifies the rate at which a module multicasts its data The time ranges from 100 microseconds to 750 milliseconds and is sent to the module with all other configuration parameters When the specified time frame elapses the module will multicast data This is also called a cyclic update Change of State COS This parameter instructs the module to transfer data whenever a specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON Mtg The module COS feature defaults to Enabled for both ON to OFF and OFF to ON COS selection occurs on a per point basis but all module data is multicast when any point enabled for COS changes state COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs TE You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you enable COS If a change does not occur within the RPI timeframe the module will still multicast data at the rate specified by the RPI Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 11 For example if an input is changing state consistently every 2 seconds and the RPI is set at 750mS the data transfer will look like Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 COS multicast q I I 8 I I t I I I I i l l I I 1250 1
299. onfigure your digital input modules to access the CST and timestamp input data with a relative time reference i e the value of the CST of when that input data changes state IMPORTANT Because only one CST value is returned to the e controller when any input point changes state it is recommended that you use timestamping on only one input point per module Table 3 4 describes the ways you can use the system clock Definition The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a particular input module point by timestamping the input data To determine a sequence of events you must e Set the input module s communications format to CST Timestamped Input Data e Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence will occur Disable COS for all other points on the module If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS your module generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state as long as the changes do not occur within 500uS of each other If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500us of each other a single CST value is generated for all making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time Timestamping in Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs feature so that after input data changes state and a timestamp occurs an output point will actuate at some configured tim
300. onically fused per point Isolation Voltage Group to group 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous User to system voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 12 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for 5 16 inch 8mm maximum RTB Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 61 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Un
301. ons See Table 2 2 on page 2 9 for differences between connection types The table also lists the advantages and disadvantages of each type Direct Connections A direct connection is a real time data transfer link between the controller and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references When module configuration data is downloaded to an owner controller the controller attempts to establish a direct connection to each of the modules referenced by the data If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control system the controller periodically checks for the presence of a device there When a device s presence is detected there the controller automatically sends the configuration data If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot a connection is made and operation begins If the configuration data is not appropriate the data is rejected and an error message displays in the software In this case the configuration data can be inappropriate for any of a number of reasons For example a module s configuration data may be appropriate except for a mismatch in electronic keying that prevents normal operation The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module Any break in the connection such as module faults or removal of the module from the chassis while under power causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area associated with the module The
302. ons European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions 1 2 3 4 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 1756 1A16l NOTES 1 Module features Module Specific Information 7 5 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 9ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 2 L2 0
303. ontrolLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Table 3 7 Recommended Fuses Circuit Type AC The following modules use electronic fusing e 1750 OA8E e 1750 OB16E e 1750 OB8EI e 1750 OG16 e 1756 OV16E e 1756 OV32E See Table 3 7 to determine what fuse to use in your application Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier 1756 0A8 None Fused IFM can be used to protect ox20mm SAN O Industry Corp outputs See publication 1492 2 12 6 3A SOC p n Medium lag MT 4 6 3A 1756 OA8E2 3 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0A16 4 5 Yes Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm Littlefuse p n 3 15A H2153 15 Slo Blow 1500A Interruption current 1756 0A16 None Fused IFM can be used to protect 5x20mm SOC p n outputs See publication 1492 2 12 8 6 34 MT 4 6 3A Medium lag 1756 ON8 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 8 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 17 Table 3 7 Recommended Fuses Circuit Type Catalog Number 1756 088 Fusing on the Module None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 8 Quick acting Recommended Fuse Fuse Supplier MQ2 4A 1756 OB8E 2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0B16E 2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per gro
304. or planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 8 Module Specific Information 1756 1A32 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 9ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 3 m tia IN 0 IN 3 0o 4 e IN 2 a Group 0 IN 5 g 6 5g IN 4 Group 0 IN 7 Tele 7 IN 6 NOTES Daisy chain IN 9 o IN 1 All terminals with the same name are connected to other RTBs IN 11 S 12 111457 IN 10 together on the module For example L2 can be IN 13 g 1413 4 connected to any terminal marked L2 0 IN 15 g sa IN 2 When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB 12 0 gs vg 12 0 always connect the daisy chain as shown above 17 E 20 19 P Do not connect more than 2 wires to any single N 19 oz a 18 oT terminal 21 Ho
305. ower Loss Detection Enabled 4 29 Communications Format CST timestamped fuse 6 6 data output data Output State in Program Mode Off 6 13 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 13 Transition from Program State to Fault State Off 6 13 Figure 7 19 J Daisy chain to Not used H HD L2 0 other RTBs 4 L1 0 ie H OUT 0 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same all name are connected Group 0 L1 0 I ic OUT 1 Group 0 together on the module For 7 example L1 can be L1 0 ie ee OUT 2 connected to any terminal is marked L1 0 L1 0 ie aly OUT 3 2 Do not physically connect ua a 7 more than two wires to a L1 1 OUT 4 single RTB terminal When us n J e emd L1 1 IS I outs you daisy chain from a il aX group to another RTB i 77 a BTID always connect the daisy Lp chain as shown Group 1 L1 1 ig Ie Group 1 3 This wiring example shows H q a single voltage source IQ 4 If separate power sources B L2 are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage L1 40185 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator Diagnostic Control Block with 5 eave Opto amp Transformer Isolation L1 urge ee gt AC OUTPUT ControlBus 2 iatea me eh Surge 60 C 3 Short GATE ea ST 012345679 vet Deg Lees Fir01234567 fy No im OUT Continuous 60 C 6 L2 0 Display Loss of Field Power Time 43ms DIAGNOSTIC 41118 M 40848 M 20935 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Info
306. p at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data Output data Off On status for the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 On Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Table A 6 Tag Definitions A 5 Diagnostic Input Module Tags Tables A 6 and A 7 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules Input modules have two types of tags e configuration e input data IMPORTANT The table below lists all possible diagnostic input module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor COSOnOffEn 1bit per point COS OffOnEn 1 bit per point Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Configuration Definition Change of State ON to OFF Triggers an event in the controller for ON to OFF transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 disable 1 enable Change of State OFF to ON Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to ON transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 disable 1 enable DiagCOSDisable per module Configuration Diagnos
307. packaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity EC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment when product is marked CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions 1 2 3 4 Maximum wire size will
308. perating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when produc is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000
309. ply voltage for each module must not drop below the minimum state motor starter supply voltage Catalog Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Number Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Starter Starter Starter Starter Starter 1756 OA161 16 15 30C 13 30C 8 30C 5 30C 12 60C 10 60C 6 60C 4 60C 1756 0A16 16 14 4 None None Only 7 per Only 2 per group group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 30C 5 30C 6 60C 4 60C 1756 OA8D 8 8 8 None None 1756 OA8E 8 8 8 6 6 30 C Only 3 per Only 3 per group group 4 60C Only 2 per group Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 D 2 Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Table D 2 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 230V ac 60Hz Catalog Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Number Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Starter Starter Starter Starter Starter 1756 O0A16l 16 16 16 16 30 C 111 30 C 13 60C 9 60C 1756 0A16 16 16 16 4 2 Only 2 per Only 1 per group group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 8 Table D 3 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starter 24V ac 60Hz Catalog Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Number Motor Motor Motor Motor Motor Starter Starter Starter Starter Starter 1756 ON8 4 30 c 4 30 Cc None None None 3 60C 3 60C Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules D 3 Determining the Maximu
310. proved Equipment for use A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive complian EN 50082 2 Industri EN 61326 Meas Control Lab EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity ial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx 4 European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with ally Explosive Atmospheres Protection EN 50021 Potenti m in Class Division 2 Group ndustrial Requirements with 1 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Use this conductor category info Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines mation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 68 Module Specific Information 1756 0B161 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description
311. pulse is Output_Verify_Delay Pulse_Test_Parameters 8 2 completed before declaring a fault Output verify INT delay parameter is needed to account for the hardware propagation delay Units are in 100us increments Default tag value 2ms i e 20 Current CST Time from Module CST_Information 0 Current_Time 8 DINT 2 Status of CST in Module CST_Information 8 CST_Status 2 BitO O timer OK 1 timer fault INT Bit1 O no ramping 1 ramping ramping indicates that once time is synchronized it will correct errors by slowly ramping to the master s time Bit2 O not time master 1 time master e g controller Bit3 O time not synced 1 time synced with master Size of timer in bits CST_Information 10 CST_Timer_Size 2 INT Unused CST_Information 12 CST_reserved 8 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Table B 2 Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Versions 9 and Earlier Source Destination Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration B 7 Description Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from Tag in MSG generic source destination buffers Instruction aoe Source Destination Length bytes WHO_Information Device manufacturer s vendor ID e g 1 AB WHO_Information 0 WHO_vendor 2 SINT 47 INT Device s product type e g 7 Digital 1 0 WHO_Information 2 WHO_product_type 2 IN
312. puts go to zero 0 during program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will go to zero 0 The following examples are instances where you may need to use module inhibiting e Multiple controllers own the same digital input module A change is required in the module s configuration however the change must be made to the program in all controllers In this case you can a Inhibit the module b Change configuration in all controllers c Unihibit the module e You want to FLASH upgrade an digital I O module We recommend you a Inihibit the module b Perform the upgrade c Uninhibit the module e You are using a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet but you do not want the controller to continually look for a module that does not exist yet In this case you can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 8 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Table 3 4 Use of timestamping Timestamping for a Sequence of Events Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs Controllers generate a 64 bit Coordinated System Time CST for their respective chassis The CST is a chassis specific time that is not synchronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over ControlNet to establish a NUT as described in Chapter 2 You can c
313. r 2004 B 16 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Using Tags in Ladder Logic When using tags in ControlLogix digital I O ladder logic applications you must remember the following e Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit basis For example point 0 bit 0 on the module e If you are performing a service through the tags a value of 0 prevents the action from occurring and a value of 1 causes the action to occur For example if you want to reset the electronic fuse on a particular bit enter 1 in the tags e If you are checking the response of a service through the tags a value of 0 means the bit passed the service and a value of 1 means the bit failed the service For example if you perform a pulse test and the response displays a 0 for a particular bit the bit passed the test Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Appendix C Table C 1 Power Supply Sizing Chart Power Supply Sizing Chart Use Table C 1 to check the power your ControlLogix chassis is using Slot Module Current 5 1V Power Current 24 Power 24 Current Power Number Catalog DC mA 5 1V DC VDC mA VDC Watts 3 3V DC mA 3 3V DC Number Watts Watts 0 X5 1V x 24V X3 3V 1 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 2 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 3 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 4 x5 1V x 24V x3 3V 5 x5 1V
314. r controller to the module once the owner controller has produced it They do not take into account the user program time in the owner controller The receipt of new data is a function of the length of the user program and its asynchronous relationship with the RPI Also if your application uses e 1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR series D e RSLogix 5000 version 8 or greater the owner controller updates remotely located digital output modules at the end of each task as well as at the RPI as described earlier in this section Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 18 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Listen Only Mode Remote Output Modules Connected Via EtherNet IP When remote digital output modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network the controller multicasts data in the following way 1 At the RPI the owner controller multicasts data within its own chassis 2 The 1756 ENBT module in the local chassis immediately sends the data over the network to the digital output module as long as it has not sent data within a timeframe that is 1 4 the value of the digital module s RPI Any controller in the system can listen to the data from any I O module e g input data echoed output data or echoed diagnostic information even if the controller does not own the module i e it does not have to hold the module s configuration data to listen to the module
315. r does not illuminate without field power applied Module status This green display indicates the module s communication status OK LED Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the presence FLT LEDs or absence of various faults Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and FUSE LED indicates the state of the module s fuse For examples of LED status indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules see Chapter 7 Full Class Division 2 Compliance All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2 system certification This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in an environment other than only a 100 hazard free IMPORTANT Modules should not be pulled under power nor should a powered RTB be removed in a Class I Division 2 environment UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV Agency Approvals Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV agency approval are marked as such Ultimately all digital modules will have these agency approvals and be marked accordingly Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features 3 11 Using Features Specific to Standard Input Modules Change the RPI on the Connection tab Enable and disable COS on the Configuration tab e Check the box to enable COS for a point e Clear the box to dis
316. r on the module For Daisy chain to i Wai L1 0 Loss of Field Power Not used i 42 example L2 can be connected to any other RTBs 2 NWT terminal marked L2 0 l Group 0 L2 0 i S IN 0 Group 0 2 This wiring example shows a single il IN voltage source L2 0 ie P IN 1 3 Do not physically connect more than two fll bX wires to a single RTB terminal When you L2 0 ie ia IN 2 62kQ 1 2W daisy chain from a group to other RTBs itt glee 5 resistor always connect the daisy chain as shown L2 0 ie HL IN 3 4 Resistors are not necessary if Wire Off diagnostic is not used L2 1 K5 lap IN 4 5 If separate power sources are used do not 14 exceed the specified isolation voltage L2 1 i IN 5 62kQ 1 2W Te L 5 resistor To Determine Leakage Resistor L2 1 i I B IN 6 P S Field side power supply i 1 RieaMaximum P S Voltage 19V ac 1 5mA L2 1 ee IEB N 7 RieaxMinimum P S Voltage 20V ac 2 5mA a IAA L2 1 ee ap L1 1 Loss of Field Power Recommended Values L2 Power Supply Rieak 1 2W L Voltage 5 100V ac 10 43kQ L 110V ac 10 ATkQ 40202 115V ac 10 ATkQ 120V ac 10 51kQ Simplitied schematic GND GND a CeT lL 5V K amp K Input t ___ Display gt 5V Control Bus Interface Open wire 4 j Control Bus Interface Display t LED indicator AC INPUT 3 H 6 ST01234567 0 FT
317. r ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient EC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF EC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Oscillatory Surge EEE C37 90 1 Withstand 4kV Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel4 European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n Zone 2 when conformal coated 1 2 3 4 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category info installation manual mation f
318. rates with the following definitions of ON and OFF states 0 2V to 0 8V dc Input guaranteed to be in ON state 0 8 to 2 0V dc Input state not Guaranteed 2 0 to 5 5V de Input guaranteed to be in OFF state Nominal Input Current 3 7mA 5V de Input Delay Time OFF to ON 5V to OV dc transition ON to OFF OV to 5V dc transition Hardware Delay 270us nominal 450ps maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 390s nominal 700p1s maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time Oms 1ms 2ms Sms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of State Timestamp of Inputs Software configurab 200us oO Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100us minimum to 750ms maximum Reverse Polarity Protection None damage to circuitry may result Isolation Group Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 2 groups of 8 250V maximum continuous 250V maximum continuous RTB Screw Torque NEMA clamp 7 to 9 inch pounds 0 8 to 1Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 20 position RTB 1756 TBNH or 1756 TBSH 2 Conductors Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 213 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 U
319. re 7 7 l NOTES 1 All terminals with the same Isolated DC 0 o gyp 0 2 18 IN O O DC 0 name are connected together wiring DC 1 GND 1 1E 4 3G IN 1 o o o DC 1 on the module For example GND 2 a 6 5 IN 2 DC can be connected to GND 3 g 8 7 IN 3 either terminal marked Source Input wiring GND 4 T amp E 10 9G IN 4 Sink In GND 15 DC 5 o 6 oO GND 5 o 12 nen IN S o DC 5 put 2 Do not physically connect more DC 6 o o GND 6 g 14 13 Dr IN 6 o DC 6 wiring than two wires to a single RTB GND 7 1 16 15 4 IN 7 terminal When you use the GND 8 1 18 17 IN 8 second GND 15 terminal to Jumper bar Cut to eT GND 9 E 20 198 IN 9 daisy chain to other RTBs GND 10 OO 22 211 IN 10 o always connect the daisy chain GND 11 JQ 4 2318 IN 11 6 lt lt as shown Non isolated GND 12 HE 26 25 IN 12 o o 3 Each input can be wired in a wiring GND 13 1G 28 27 IN 13 o sink or source configuration GND 14 E 30 29 IN 14 o oO as shown l GND 15 6 2 31k IN 15 o 4 The jumper bar part number is DC o GND 15 6o 3o Not used DC 97739201 Contact your local Notused G 36 3512 Not used Rockwell Automation sales A i representative to order additional jumper bars if necessary Daisy chain to 5 If separate power sources are other RTBs 30245 M used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic LED indicator ay DC
320. require extended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 62 Module Specific Information 1756 0B16D NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example DC COM can be connected to either terminal marked GND 1 2 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to another RTB always connect the daisy chain as shown 3 This wiring example shows a single voltage source 4 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Simplified schematic Short Circuit 5V 5V Detect h wl Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 4 11 No Load Detection Enabled 4 24 Field Side Output Verification Enabled 4 25 Pulse Test Performed at user s request 4 26 Communications Fo
321. ribed in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other 1756 0B16E Module features Module Specific Information 7 65 The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 output data Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 22 our ED IED ouro OUT 3 eS GD our 2 NOTES 1 Do not physically Group 0 OUT 5 1 i OUT 4 Group 0 connect more than two I B wires to a single RTB Daisy chain to OUT 7 ic ie OUT 6 terminal When you other RTBs ae ae daisy chain from a group DC 0 J 1 RTN OUT 0 to another RTB always connect the daisy chain OUT 9 OUT 8 as shown 4 3 2 This wiring example OUT 11 ie ie shows a single voltage zG i Paes Group 1 OUT 13 ip ie Group 1 3 If separate power T T sources are used do not OUT
322. rmat CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 output data Output State in Program Mode Off 6 13 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 13 Transition from Program State to Fault State Off 6 13 Figure 7 21 Daisy chain to other RTBs Group 0 Daisy chain to OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 Control Bus Display Output verify No Load Group 0 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 other RTBs OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT 10 OUT 11 Group 1 OUT 12 Group 1 OUT 13 OUT 14 QUT 15 Not used Not used DC COM 40173 M DC Surge Current Chart LED indicator Surge 4A gt DC OUTPUT A ST01234567 3 an Continuous 30 C FIT01234567 a T ST 8 9 10111213 1415 Continuous 60 C FLT 8 9 10111213 1415 our K RTN A DIAGNOSTIC 0 f 10ms 30343 M Time 40849 M 40463 M 1756 0B16D Specifications Module Specific Information 7 63 Number of Outputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 250mA 5 1V dc amp 140mA 24V de Total backplane power 4 64W Maximum Power Dissipation Module 3 3W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 11 25 BTU hr e utput Voltage Range
323. rmation 7 57 1756 OA8D Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 175mA 5 1V de amp 250mA 24V de Total backplane power 6 89W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 3w 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 18 BTU hr e utput Voltage Range 74 132V ac 47 63Hz e utput Current Rating Per Point Per Module 1A max 30 C amp 0 5A maximum 60 C Linear derating 8A max 30 C amp 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 8A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 30 C 5A for 43ms each repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2 5V peak 0 5A amp 3V peak 1A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz ON to OFF 9 3ms 60Hz 11ms 50Hz Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Mode per Point Diagnostic Functions Short Trip NoLload Output Verification Pulse Test Field Power Loss Zero Cross Timestamp of diagnostics 12A for 500us minimum Off state detection only On state detection only User selectable maximum width amp us
324. rminal marked roup 0 DC 0 l H Dup RTN OUT 1 e IS IB 2 Do not physically connect RTN OUT 0 H i more than two wires to a LS ep single RTB terminal When DC 1 you daisy chain from a WD group to another RTB DC 1 ie ies always connect the daisy Group 1 a D Group 1 chain as shown DC 1 i 3 This wiring example shows Bi a single voltage source DC 1 IEB I 4 If separate power sources T i are used do not exceed the RTN OUT 1 D specified isolation voltage 40181 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator DC 0 p Surge 45V 4A gt DC OUTPUT A pa OUT 0 3 E k 5 pags ST01234567 g VY a i Eal L soc E S aes 6 ControlBus Interface lt Display t 0 10ms 30347 M Time 40849 M 40466 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 OB8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 165mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 89W Maximum Power Dissipation 25W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 8 53 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30V de Output Current Rating Per Point 2A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each repeatable every 1s 60 C Minimum Load Curre
325. rocess Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations CE European Union 89 336 EEC EM EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 6100 EN 6100 C Tick Aus AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emi 0 6 2 Industrial Immuni ralian Radiocommunica 0 6 4 Industrial Emissions nn C Directive compliant with y ions Act compliant with ssions 1 Maximum wire size will require extended housing 1756 TBE 2 manual 3 Use this conductor information for planning cond ctor routing as described in the system level installation Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines 4 See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 74 Module Specific Information 1756 0B32 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default
326. roduce information when needed while providing additional system functions Table 1 2 lists the features available on ControlLogix digital I O modules that allow greater system applicability Table 1 2 ControlLogix Digital I O Module Features Feature Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP Description This system feature allows you to remove and insert modules and RTB while power is applied For more information on RIUP see page 1 6 Producer consumer communications These communications are an intelligent data exchange between modules and other system devices in which each module produces data without having been polled System timestamp of data A 64 bit system clock places a timestamp on the transfer of data between the module and its owner controller within the local chassis Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic detection Fault and diagnostic detection capabilities that provide you the information necessary to most effectively and efficiently use your module and troubleshoot your application Class Division 2 UL CSA FM and CE Agency Certification Full agency certification for in any application that requires approval of the agencies listed Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 1 2 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Using an I O Module in the ControlLogix System ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and use a Removabl
327. ropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a Module Fault Word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits bits 0 15 are used in the Module Fault Word Fault bits in the Field Power Loss Word and Open Wire Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things as indicated in Table 4 15 Table 4 15 This condition Set these bits Communications fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Field power loss Only the bit s affected is set to 1 Open wire The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital input modules Figure 4 2 r Bit 0 Module Fault Word 1 1 All modules A communications fault sets all bits in the Module i Fault Word A Field Power Loss or Open Wire condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word Group Group 0 Field Power Loss Word 1 1756 IA8D only A loss of field power sets the bit s for that group in the Field Power Loss Word and also se
328. rse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 30V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 30V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors Wire Size Category 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 76 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz
329. ry 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 2mA per output Maximum On State Voltage Drop 700mV dc 1A Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point Output Delay Time OFF to ON 75us nominal 1ms maximum ON to OFF 360us nominal 1ms maximum Diagnostic Functions Short Trip 5A for 20mS 24V dc Output ON then shorted Timestamp of diagnostics 5A for 20mS 24V dc Output turned ON into short 1ms Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the CST Configurable Fault States per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Electronically fused per group Reverse Polarity Protection None If module is wired incorrectly outputs may be damaged Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque NEMA clamp 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB
330. s Isolated with 120V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output Isolated with 240V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital I O Module F 5 Table F 1 For this Use one of these IFMs With this prewired cable catalog n mb r Catalog number IFM Type Description 1756 0A8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 LED indicating Isolated with 120V ac LEDs and 4 1492 CABLExW x cable length terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS1 20 2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Isolated with 4 terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS240 4 Isolated with 4 terminals with 240V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 1756 OA8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 LED indicating Isolated with 120V ac LEDs and 4 1492 CABLExV x cable length terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS1 20 2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V ac blown fuse indicators for outputs 14
331. s Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 31 Daisy chain to other RTBs ie ICS OUT 0 4 L1 0 i TOI OUT 1 IDIS Group 0 L1 0 ie i T QUT 2 Group 0 L1 0 ie Way OUT 3 Hl gil L1 0 ie Not used 42 Wes N L1 1 Sb Ge OUT 4 L1 1 ice HL OUT 5 Hb a Group 1 L1 1 ig JEB OUT 6 Group 1 8 r i dD z DE w i L2 ie lap Not used 40184 M Surge Current Chart LED indicator AE Surge 20A gt AC OUTPUT 3 8101234567 Q S K S 6 2A L m 0 43 41161 M Time ms 40852 M 20978 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 93 1756 ON8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 200mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 1 07 Maximum Power Dissipation 5 1W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr e utput Voltage Range 10 30V ac current gt 50ma 47 63Hz 16 30V ac current lt 50ma 47 63Hz o utput Current Rating Per Point Per Module 2A maximum 60 C 5A maximum 30 C 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Min Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak 2A amp 6V peak load curr
332. s Next Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 108 Module Specific Information Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 What This Chapter Contains Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your Module Troubleshooting Your Module Chapter 8 This chapter describes the status indicators on the ControlLogix digital modules and how to use them to troubleshoot the module Table 8 1 For information about See page Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your Module 8 1 Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your Module 8 5 Each ControlLogix I O module has indicators which show individual I O state yellow fault or fuse status red A bi colored LED indicates module status with an OK red green Status indicators are located on the front of the module Status Indicators for Input Modules Table 8 2 Status Indicators for Input Modules Status This display Means Take this indicators action OK Green light The inputs are being multicast None and in normal operating state OK Flashing green The module has passed None light internal diagnostics but is not multicasting inputs or it is inhibited OK Flashing red light Previously established Check controller communication has timed out and chassis communication OK Red light The module must be replaced Replace the module 1 0 State Yellow The input is active None 1 0 Fault Red A fault has occurred for
333. ser program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix A Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 4 28 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Click on Reset to reset the fuse for a point on the module Reset the Electronic Fusing in RSLogix 5000 as shown below Your RSLogix 5000 project must be online for you to reset a fuse E Module Properties Local 6 1756 OA8D 2 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Pulse Test Backplane Reset f Reset Status Offline Cancel Apply Help For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse in RSLogix 5000 see page 6 19 For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse using a ladder logic program see page B 12 IMPORTANT Electronic fuses are also reset through a software reset or when the output module is power cycled Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Enable and disable field power loss detection on the Configuration tab e Check the box to enable field power loss detection e Clear the box to disable field power loss detection ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 29 Field Power Loss Detection This feature is used when field power to the module is lost or zero cross cannot be detected A point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted m Only enable Field Power Loss detection for poi
334. sing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80MHz to 2000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 1890Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient Immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipmen CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable
335. stance ra QO Enable O Enable Waiting O Start Done Done Length 0 Eror Code A 3 Extended Error Code I Timed Out Error Path a Error Text omen tw eee f In versions 10 or greater of RSLogix 5000 you can use a pull down menu to choose the Service Type Table B 2 contains information that must be entered on the configuration pop up screen to perform I O module services This information is only necessary if you are configuring the message with RSLogix 5000 version 9 or earlier Table B 1 Module Services and Configuration Pop Up Screen Information Required for RSLogix 5000 Versions 9 and Earlier Retrieve CST Retrieve Device Reset the Reset Latched Reset Electronic Pulse Test information Information Module Diagnostics Fuse WHO Service Code 1 1 5 4b 4d 4c Object Type 77 1 1 1d input 1e le modules 1e output modules Object ID 1 1 1 1 1 1 Object Attribute NA NA NA NA NA NA Source NA NA NA Enable_32_Points Enable_32_Points Pulse_Test_Param DINT DINT eters SINT 10 Number of Elements 0 0 0 4 4 10 bytes Destination CST_Information WHO_Information NA NA Results_32 Points NA SINT 20 SINT 48 DINT Modules All All All 1756 OA8D 1756 OA8D OB16D 1756 OA8D OB16D OA8E OB16D IA8D IB16D only Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 B 6 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration When you are using RSLog
336. stem with the wrong module in the wrong slot For example if you select Exact Match and a module with revision 2 2 is placed in a location configured for a module with revision 2 4 the controller does not make a connection to the new module because of the mismatched revisions Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 6 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Table 4 3 Keying option Exact Match Table 4 3 describes the keying options available with your ControlLogix digital I O module Definiton All of the parameters listed above must match or the inserted module will reject a connection to the controller Compatible Module The Compatible Match mode allows an I O module to determine whether it can emulate the module defined in the configuration sent from the controller With ControlLogix digital I O modules the module can emulate older revisions The module will accept the configuration if the configuration s major minor revision is less than or equal to the physical module s revision For example if the configuration contains a major minor revision of 1 7 the module inserted into the slot must have a firmware revision of 1 7 or higher for a connection to be made When a module is inserted with a major minor revision that is less than the revision for which the slot is configured i e the module has a revison of 1 6 and the slot is configured for a module with revision 1 8 no connecti
337. stic Output Module Input Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data FuseBlown Input Data Fuse is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short circuit 1 bit per point condition for an output point All FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the User 0 no fault 1 fault NoLoad Input data No Load Diagnostic which indicates the absence of a load e g the wire is 1 bit per group disconnected from the module This diagnostic only operates in the OFF state 0 no fault 1 fault OutputVerifyFault Input data Output Verify Diagnostic which indicates that the output has been commanded to the 1 bit per point ON state but the output has not been verified to be ON 0 no fault 1 fault output is not ON Output Data Tag Table A 10 Diagnostic Output Module Output Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with Scheduled 8 bytes Outputs and Coordinated System Time CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST Timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data Output data Off On status for the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 0 Off 1 On Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Appendix B Using M
338. sy Group 1 1 2 Group 1 chain as shown L1 1 ice GP OUT 6 3 This wiring example shows tian Has a single voltage source L1 1 K OUT 7 4 f separate power sources i oe are used do not exceed the L1 1 Jam Not used specified isolation voltage aaa a L2 L 40178 M Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator 5V L1 0 _ 20A Surge i gt AC OUTPUT as 8 ay ny g Aan I j aa 7 OUT 0 K Control Bus Interface 2A 6 Display 0 43ms 41161 M Time 40852 M 20978 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 0A8 Specifications Number of Outputs 8 4 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Curren 200mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 1 07W Maximum Power Dissipation 5 1W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac 47 63Hz Output Current Rating Per Poin 2A maximum 60 C Linear derating Per Module 5A maximum 30 C amp 4A maximum 60 C Linear derating Surge Current per Point 20A for 43ms each repeatable every 2s 60 C Minimum Load Current 10mA per point Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak 2A amp 6V peak current lt 50mA Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA
339. t ott on gt On onor gt Off On off UIST ik 745 COS for a point xI ujojols jojn xI ono xI Status Offline Cancel App Help For a more detailed explanation of these features see page 2 10 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 12 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Use the pulldown to set the input filter times on the Configuration tab Software Configurable Filter Times ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules Set filter times as shown below E Module Properties Local 1 1756 1416 2 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Enable Change of State Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Modules ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate on separate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual isolation or point to point isolation Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are chann
340. t Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 28 Module Specific Information Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Oscillatory Surge IEEE C37 90 1 Withstand 4kV Enclosure Type
341. t and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 disable 1 enable COS OffOnEn Configuration Change of State OFF to ON Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to ON 1 bit per point transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 disable 1 enable FilterOnOff_0_7 etc 1 byte per group Configuration Filter Times ON to OFF Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for ON to OFF transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 A 2 Tag Definitions Table A 1 Standard Input Module Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor FilterOffOn_0 7 etc 1 byte per group Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Definition Filter Times OFF to ON Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for OFF to ON transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms Input Data Tags Table A 2 Standard Input Module Input Data Tags Name as listed in Configuration Definition the Tag Editor or 1 0 Data CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to indicate the 8 bytes time that dat
342. t circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached All other channels will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU Bridge etc The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions The protections is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V dc The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU Bridge etc What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 24 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Current flow with output ON Enable and disable no load detection on the Configuration tab No Load Detection For each output point No Load detects the absence of field wiring or a missing load from each output point in the off state only The output circuit on a diagnostic output mod
343. t normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment e Touch a grounded object to discharge potential Static e Wear an approved grounding wriststrap e Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e If available use a static safe workstation When not in use store the equipment in appropriate static safe packaging Removal and Insertion Under Power These modules are designed to be installed or removed while chassis power is applied A When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Environment and Enclosure What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 7 ATTENTION A This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category II applications as defined in IEC publication 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 meters without derating This equipment is considered Group 1 Class A industrial equipment according to IEC CISPR Publication 11 W
344. t physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain to other RTBs always connect the daisy chain as shown This wiring example shows a Single voltage source If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 15 IN 1 2 1 4 IN O IN 3 C l4 3 IN 5 Ee 5 IN 7 le 7 Group 0 IN 9 lio 9 IN 11 Je j12 IN 13 Tq 14 Daisy chain to IN 15 Hey 16 other RTBs DC 1 E18 m N 17 J9 2 IN 19 E 22 IN 21 q 24 IN 23 26 Group 1 IN 25 0E 28 IN 27 20 IN 29 1 32 IN 31 34 DC 1 E 36 Simplified schematic DC 0 COH 4 Vv IN 0 7 D 4 D e An EN ControlBus Interface Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Display 42842 M 42573 LED indi
345. t to 1 regardless of the module s density Communications fault Figure 3 1 offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital input modules Figure 3 1 Bit 0 42676 A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault Word Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 3 22 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix digital output modules multicast fault status data to any Between Output Modules owner listening controllers and Controller All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page Table 3 10 lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard output module Table 3 10 Tag Description Module Fault This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This Word word is available on all digital output modules Fuse Blown Word This word indicates a point group fuse blown on the module It s tag name is FuseBlown This word is only available on 1756 0A16 1756 OA8E 1756 OB16E 1756 OB8EI and 1756 OV16E modules For more information on fusing see page 3 15 Field Power Loss This word indicates a loss of field power to a
346. tamped Input Data Communications Format 6 6 D Data Exchange Producer consumer model 2 9 2 14 3 9 4 9 data exchange producer consumer model 1 1 Data Transmissions Choosing an input module communications format 6 6 Choosing an output module communications format 6 7 COS 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 17 Diagnostic change of state 4 17 Diagnostic output modules 4 29 RPI 2 10 3 11 4 14 4 17 Glossary 4 Using COS on nondiagnostic input modules 6 10 Using timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs B 9 Default Configuration 6 8 Diagnostic Change of State 4 17 4 29 Diagnostic Latching 3 19 4 10 Diagnostic Timestamp 4 11 Direct Connection 2 6 Glossary 1 documentation for related products Preface 3 Dynamic Reconfiguration 6 14 E Electronic Keying 3 5 4 5 6 8 Glossary 2 Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5 Compatible match Glossary 1 Disable keying Glossary 2 Exact match Glossary 2 electronic keying compatible match 3 6 4 6 disable keying 3 6 4 6 exact match 3 6 4 6 electrostatic discharge preventing 1 6 EtherNet IP 2 2 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 event tasks 2 11 Extended Depth Housing Cabinet size considerations 5 10 Using 5 9 5 10 F Fault Reporting Determining fault type with RSLogix 5000 Diagnostic input modules 4 29 Diagnostic modules 4 4 4 12 Diagnostic output modules 4 19 4 31 Standard input modules 3 21 Standard modules 3 4 Standard output modules 3 22 Field Power Loss Detection
347. te OUT 1 NO 2 Do not physically connect more DC 2 4 1 2 OUT 2 NC h han two wires to a single RTB Dto 9g oo i DC 2 erminal When you use the L1 2 D2 OUT 2 N 0 hird L1 7 terminal to daisy TE g V4 13 ae a chain to other RTBs always Dpe 15 DAA J bar Cut to length connect the daisy chain to the uimpe bar utto ena a G8 17 OUT 4 N C erminal directly connected to i HD2 19 DH OUT 4 N O i he supply wire as shown i z D 2 o e emi 3 When using the jumper bar to Non isolated ates i daisy chain terminals together wiring L1 6 D 25 OUT 6 N C j as shown the maximum L1 6 I 28 27 I OUT 6N 0 a a current you may apply to the L1 7 30 29 g OUT 7 N C it module through a single L1 7 Djs 31 OUT 7 N 0 o contact point is 8A L1 O L 7 D ae Not used L 4 The jumper bar part number is Not used 35 Not used 97739201 Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales Y representative to order additional jumper bars if Daisy hee other ATBS L 30241 M necessary 5 If separate power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage simplified schematic LED indicator 24V hs eg ee gt RELAY OUTPUT TAS L1 0 3 2 RAJ a ae eon or OUT 0 N C K Control Bus l 8 Interface gt i ee oe C D OUT 0 N O Display gt 30344 M 40456 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 105 1756 OX8I Specifications
348. tended housing 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level ication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other Module Specific Information 7 53 1756 0A8 Module features The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Communications Format Output data 6 6 Output State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 18 z i L1 0 i i aa OUT 0 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same H l T 1 name are connected Elo ie E ae together on the module For Group 0 11 0 T ir OUT 2 Group 0 example L1 can be NUT connected to any terminal L1 0 ie Way OUT 3 marked L1 0 Daisy chain to m 2 Do not physically connect other RTBs L1 0 ie JL Not used more than two wires to a 4 single RTB terminal When L1 1 I IES our 4 you daisy chain from a i 3e group to another RTB L1 1 ice GP OUT 5 always connect the dai
349. tes once and initializes the LastTimestamp LastTimestamp is used to detect a Change of State on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 B 10 Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Rung 3 is the main rung which checks for Change of State on the input point by comparing the current input timestamp e Time_at_which_Input_Changed with the last timestamp ie LastTimestamp The input point i e point 0 must have Change of State enabled or the timestamp will not update when the point transitions e g OFF ON Once Change of State has been detected 10ms is ADDed to the input timestamp and sent to the output module s timestamp This will cause the output module to apply its output exactly 10ms i e 10 000uUs after the input changed state The MOVe instructions update LastTimestamp in preparation for the next change of state IMPORTANT Timestamps are 8 bytes in size two DINTs but only the lower 4 bytes of the output timestamp i e Time_at_which_Output_Will_Change are used to schedule the outputs into the future to a max of 16 7s or 16 700 000us LastTimestamp 1 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 These tags were created for this ladder logic Using Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration B 11 Rung 4 is the standard XIC
350. that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product Isolation Voltage Channel to channel User side to system side 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1 second 250V ac maximum continuous voltage RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 113 4 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 52 Module Specific Information Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat
351. the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Change of State COS OFF ON Enabled 2 10 ON OFF Enabled Software Configurable Filter Times OFF ON 1ms 3 12 ON OFF 1ms Communications Format Input data 6 6 Figure 7 10 Wiring Diagram for Applications that Do Not Require CE Compliance DC DC 0 IN 9 IN 1 IN 1 IN 1 DC 1 NOTES 1 We recommend you use this d CE compliance p ele Saj K aE D IB pA is Ko a Io IG KD E IN 0 IN 2 IN 4 IN 6 DC COM 0 l IN 8 IN 10 IN 12 IN 14 DC COM 1 iagram for applications that do not require 2 Do not connect more than two wires to any single terminal 3 This example shows devices wired to only one of two groups on the module You can make connections to the second group on terminals 11 20 Simplified schematic Wiring Diagram for CE Compliant and High Noise Applicationsg 1 0 wire 7 a a IN 1 ig IGS IN 0 ji e li F Li IN 3 1D ig IN 2 ae J H Ie lias CD IN 4 VOwire DC power E 7 IZA is T wire ve ip lies IN 6 J F z f KO iA oc como z ooa DI eemo o E N 9 IEB IGS
352. ther Change of State or Cyclic Time 3 11 Software Configurable Filter Times 3 12 Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules 3 12 Multiple Input Point Densities 3 12 Using Features Specific to Standard Output Modules 3 13 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States 3 13 Output Data Henrie a anes eae eae kee aes 3 14 Field Wiring Options 403 0 pegs boas beef ema a pena 3 15 Multiple Output Point Densities 3 15 FUSNES Sig fom psd cd a SH HOR P UE The AF LER LH A oh eh 3 15 Field Power Loss Detection unis eed hie wes eed 3 18 Diagnostic Latch of Information 3 19 Time Scheduled Output Control naana aaaea aaa 3 20 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and SOMPOMCRS iss een eek ae Rodd a a aE an Raed Et 3 21 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controlereios read ec PAK Aa e E Se aa 3 22 Chapter Summary and What s Next 3 23 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Table of Contents 3 Chapter 4 What This Chapter Contains cy via pteeto wen EO 4 1 Determining Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 4 1 Determining Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 4 2 Features on ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Modules 4 3 Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Modules 5 sin 5 5 e546 Sees
353. tic Change of State Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic status data with an updated timestamp as soon as the diagnostic data changes state Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 A 6 Tag Definitions Table A 6 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor FaultLatchEn 1 bit per point Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Definition Fault is Latched If enabled for a point any OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss will stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until the User clears the fault 0 disable 1 enable latching FieldPwrLossEn 1 bit per point Configuration Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 0 disable 1 enable FilterOnOff_0_7 etc 1 byte per group FilterOffOn_0 7 etc 1 byte per group Configuration Configuration Filter Times ON to OFF Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for ON to OFF transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms Filter Times OFF to ON Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for OFF to ON transition Operates on groups of 8 points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2ms Valid AC filter times 1 2ms OpenWireEn 1 bit per point Configuration Open Wire Enables Open Wire diagnostic 0 disable 1 enable Preliminary
354. tic input modules have an additional pages of diagnostic services Reset Latched Diagnostics is not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during online monitoring These screens are accessed through the module s properties E Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16D 2 1 Reset Latched Diagnostics here EE za 1 Resa aa 3 Reset EA _5 Resa 6 Reset__ 7 Reset 8 Reset Ea ha Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Output Online Services Reset Electronic Fuses here Reset Latched Diagnostics here Click on Test to perform the Pulse Test for a point on the module Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Diagnostic output modules have additional pages of diagnostic services The following three diagnostics e Electronic Fuse reset e Reset Latched Diagnostics e Pulse Test These screens are accessed through the module s properties fl Module Properties Local 4 1756 OB16D 2 1 Module Properties Local 0 1756 0B16D 2 1 2 2 1 ajl RERE tetri eee kek wi 6 19 are not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during online monitoring Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 20 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Viewing and Changing Module Tags A Richt click Controller Tags B Click Monitor Tags Click on the slot number of the module you want to see
355. ting Isolated with 24 48V ac dc LEDs and 1492 IFM40D 120 4 4 terminals per output Isolated with 120V ac LEDs and 4 terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 1492 IFM40F FS120 2 1492 IFM40F FS120 4 1492 IFM40F FS240 4 Fusible One expander module is connected to a master to provide a total of 16 outpu Isolated with extra term for outputs inals Isolated with extra term ac dc blown fuse indica for outputs inals and 24V tors Isolated with extra term ac dc blown fuse indica terminals per output inals and 24V tors and 4 Isolated with extra term 120V ac blown fuse indi for outputs inals and cators Isolated with 120V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output Isolated with 240V ac blown fuse indicators and 4 terminals per output s An extender cable is included with each expander to connect it to the master Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 F 10 Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital 1 0 Module Table F 2 describes the I O module ready prewired cables available for use with your ControlLogix digital I O modules Table F2 Catalog Number Number of Conductor Size Nominal Outer RTB at the 1 0 I Conductors Diameter Module End Be 1492 CABLExU 20 22 AWG 9 0 mm 0 36 in 1756 TBNH 1492 CABLExV 1492 CABLExW 1492 CABLExX 14
356. tinuously maintain communication with its owner controller to operate normally Typically each module in the system will have only 1 owner Input modules can have more than 1 owner Output modules however are limited to a single owner For more information on the increased flexibility provided by multiple owners and the ramifications of using multiple owners see page 2 19 The I O configuration portion of RSLogix5000 generates the configuration data for each I O module in the control system whether the module is located in a local or remote chassis A remote chassis also known as networked contains the I O module but not the module s owner controller Remote chassis can be connected to the controller via a scheduled ControlNet or an EtherNet IP network Configuration data is transferred to the controller during the program download and subsequently transferred to the appropriate I O modules Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Digital I O Operation in the ControlLogix System 2 3 I O modules in the local chassis and modules in a remote chassis that is connected via the EtherNet IP network are ready to run as soon as the configuration data has been downloaded However you must run RSNetWorx for ControlNet to enable I O modules in a scheduled ControlNet chassis Running RSNetWorx transfers configuration data to I O modules on scheduled ControlNet and establishes a Network Update Time NUT for ControlNet th
357. tion 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 5 4 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module Connecting Wiring You can use an RTB or a Bulletin 1492 prewired Interface Module IFM to connect wiring to your module If you are using an RTB follow the directions below to connect wires to the RTB An IFM has been prewired before you received it If you are using an IFM to connect wiring to the module skip this section and go to page 5 8 To see a listing of the IFMs available for use with the ControlLogix analog I O modules see Appendix F Using 1492 Wiring Systems with Your Digital I O Module This chapter shows how the general guidelines for wiring your analog I O modules including grounding the cable and connecting wiring to each RTB type For more specific information on wiring individual catalog numbers refer to Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Wiring Connections Catalog number Wiring diagram on 1756 IA16 page 7 2 1756 IA161 page 7 5 1756 1A32 page 7 8 1756 IA8D page 7 11 1756 IB16 page 7 14 1756 IB16D page 7 17 1756 IB16l page 7 20 1756 1B32 B page 7 23 1756 1C16 page 7 26 1756 IG16 page 7 29 1756 1H161 page 7 32 1756 IM161 page 7 35 1756 IN16 page 7 38 1756 IV16 page 7 41 1756 IV32 page 7 44 1 The Bulletin 1492 IFM may not be used in any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system Use of the IFM violates the UL CSA and FM certifications of this product
358. to the level of the configuration For example if a slot is configured for a module with major minor revision of 1 7 and you insert a module with a major minor revision of 2 3 the module works at the 1 7 level with respect to module functions that are related to RSLogix 5000 such as interface changes However bug fixes that are affected by the module s firmware would work at the 2 3 revision level If possible we suggest you make sure configuration is updated to match the revision levels of all 1 0 modules Failure to do so may not prevent the application from working but may defeat the purpose of upgrading your modules revision levels The inserted module attempts to accept a connection to the controller regardless of its type ATTENTION Be extremely cautious when using the disable keying option if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss A If keying is disabled a controller makes a connection with most modules of the same type as that used in the slot configuration For example if a slot is configured for a 1756 IA16l standard input module and a 1756 IB16 standard input module is inserted into the slot the controller established a connection because keying is disabled A controller will not establish a connection if any of the following conditions exist even if keying is disabled e The slot is configured for one module type e g input module and a modu
359. tor Fault Bits The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is a problem with the module the commanded state and the Output Data Echo may not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions If a fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the Output Data Echo check your diagnostic output module for the following conditions e Communications fault e Connection inhibited e Blown fuse Module will not turn ON output if overload short circuit is detected e Loss of field power 1756 OA8D and 1756 OA8E only Module will not turn ON output if no AC power is detected Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 4 22 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Field Wiring Options As with diagnostic input modules ControlLogix diagnostic output modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use eTe Although some ControlLogix diagnostic I O modules provide non isolated field side wiring options each
360. tput State in Program Mode Off 6 11 Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Off 6 11 Fault State Figure 7 32 ouT 1 i out o DID OUT 3 ie ee OUT 2 OUT 5 ie ie OUT 4 Group 0 OUT 7 ie ie OUT 6 3 Daisy chain to DC 0 ie ie RTN OUT O other RTBs 2 H OUT 9 OUT 8 DID OUT 11 ie E OUT 10 OUT 13 IEB E OUT 12 Group 1 OUT 15 i OUT 14 oct IED ED arn our 1 ControlBus Interface 42673 M DC COM 42551 Surge Current Chart LED indicator DC 0 Z tO gt DC OUTPUT T oO n oO Surge 3 OUT 0 2A Continuous ST01234567 i a r FUSE E I 1A Sore ST 8 9 10111213 1415 RTN FUSE I OUT 0 0 Electronic Fuse Time 10ms ELECTRONICALLY FUSED Circuitry 40851 M 40464 M Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 1756 OV16E Specifications Number of Outputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 210mA 5 1V dc amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 1 12W Maximum Power Dissipation 6 72 W 60 C Module Thermal Dissipation 22 94 BTU hr Output Voltage Range 10 30 0V de Output Current Rating Per Point 1A maximum 60 C Per Module 8A maximum 60 C Surge Current per Point 2A for 10ms each repeatable eve
361. ts i 5 our 4 _ L ower Toi our D wr IB B ours L U OUT 7 a G our 6 DC _ DCO Ie S 1 0 wire y CH Go a BG COM o L_DC 0 4 S S Dc como F oUT 9 Gp out 8 S Boo is 1 out 9 GS EB out 8 OUT 11 IES out 10 F rat i m ouT 11 5 p our 10 ouT 13 UED out 12 output ts noes device capacitor out 13 GS S out 12 OUT 15 E out 14 0 O1uF tyoical H Hep i ou ee out 15 ED AS out 14 a E See notes below z i lee gt DC 1 5 IEB DC com 1 is DC 1 lee IEP DC COM 1 NOTES GENERAL NOTES 1 We recommend you use this diagram for applications that do not require CE 1 We recommend you use Belden M 8761 cable where shielded cables are showr compliance 2 Do not connect more than two wires to any single terminal 2 Do not connect more than two wires to any single terminal 3 This example shows devices wired to only one of two groups on the module Yo 3 This example shows devices wired to only one of two groups on the module can make connections to the second group on terminals 11 20 You can make connections to the second group on terminals 11 20 CE REQUIREMENT NOTES 1 DC power wire and 1 0 wire should not exceed 10m 30ft in length 2 The 0 01uF capacitors shown must be rated for 2000V dc Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator
362. ts the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word Open Wire Word 1 An open wire condition on any point sets the bit for that point in the Open Wire Word and also sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word 41456 Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 4 32 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules multicast fault status data to lt listeni trollers Between Output Modules ata to any Owner listening controllers and Controller All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions as shown on the next page Table 4 16 lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic output module Table 4 16 Tag Description Module Fault This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This Word word is available on all digital output modules Fuse Blown Word This word indicates a point group fuse blown on the module It s tag name is FuseBlown For more information on fusing see page 4 23 Field Power Loss This word indicates a loss of field power to a point on the module It s Word tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is available on 1756 OA8D only For more information on field power loss see page 4 19 No Load Word This word indicates
363. ture on an input module in a remote chassis allows the module to multicast data at both the RPI rate and when the input changes state This helps to reduce the Worst Case time Table 2 3 summarizes the Best Case and Worst Case scenarios from the time an input changes state to the time the owner controller will receive the data Table 2 3 Best and Worst Case Scenarios For Remote Input Data Transfer Best case scenario Worst case scenario COS disabled Backplane Network Twice the RPI transfer times lt 1mS COS enabled Backplane Network Slightly less than the RPI transfer times lt 1mS When selecting values for the remotely located module s RPI system throughput is optimized when its RPI value is a power of 2 times the current NUT running on ControlNet For example Table 2 4 shows recommended RPI values for a system using a NUT of 5mS Table 2 4 Recommended RPI Values for System Using NUT of 5mS NUT 5mS x29 x2t x22 x2 xa fxn x28 hz Optimal RPI 5mS 10mS 20mS 40mS 80mS 160mS 320mS 640mS Values mS Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 2 14 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Output Module Operation Remote Input Modules Connected Via EtherNet IP When remote digital input modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network data is transferred to the owner controller in the following way e At the
364. uipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions EEx European Union 94 9 EEC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 50021 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level Refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines See the Product Certification link at www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other 1756 0C8 NOTES 1 All terminals with the same name are connected together on the module For example DC COM can be connected to either terminal marked RTN OUT 1 2 Do not physically connect more than two wires to a single RTB terminal When you daisy chain from a group to anot
365. ule Also see FieldPwrLoss 0 no fault 1 fault Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 A 8 Tag Definitions Diagnostic Output Module Tags Tables A 8 to A 10 list and define all tags that may be used for ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Output modules have three types of tags e configuration e input data e output data Mhiiithia The table below lists all possible diagnostic output module tags In each application though the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Configuration Tags Table A 8 Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags Name as listed in the Tag Editor FaultLatchEn 1 bit per point Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Definition Fault is Latched If enabled for a point any NoLoad OutputVerifyFault or the User clears the fault This does not affect FuseBlown it is always latched 0 disable 1 enable latching FaultMode 1 bit per point FaultValue 1 bit per point FieldPwrLossEn 1 bit per point Configuration Configuration Configuration Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue OFF or ON 1 Hold Last State Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultMode 0 OFF 1 0N Field Power
366. ule has a Current Sense optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor Current flows through this sensing circuit only when the output is OFF as shown in Figure 4 1 Figure 4 1 V Current Sense Output Current flow with Transistor output OFF m681 Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification 1756 OA8D 10mA amp 1756 OB16D 3mA In the ON state the module must be connected to a load which will draw a minimum current equal to these values If a connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load current specification diagnostic output modules are capable of sensing current through the optoisolator and the load when the output point is OFF Enable No Load Detection as shown below E Module Properties Local 6 1756 OA8D 2 1 General Connection Module Inl Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane e Check the box to enable no load detection e Clear the box to disable no load detection int Output State During Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag pi bai 0 off yi oft x Vv Vv Vv Vv 4_jort lott z O M M a 2 fot xto 7 re S A M ajon Ho wr CF ro o o rT mi 4 loft xlor xl Oo fo mj A sjon Ho wr me r r K fo iors e rrr cd ron doe et Bw O cd r Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode stat
367. um Short Trip 5A for 20ms 24Vdc Output on then shorted 5A for 20ms 24V dc Output turned on into short Timestamp of 1 0ms Diagnostics Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum reference to the Configurable Fault States per Point Configurable States in Program Mode per Point Coordinated System Time Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Hold Last State ON or OFF OFF is the default Fusing Electronically fused per group Reverse Polarity Protection Yes for 60 seconds maximum 60 C without circuit damage conditional Each output group s power supply input requires external current limiting protection less than 15A Time to current limit should be less than 60 seconds to afford maximum protection to the module s circuits Isolation Voltage Group to Group User to System 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V maximum continuous voltage between groups 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V maximum continuous voltage between groups RTB Screw Torque NEMA clamp 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 7 100 Module Specific Information Conductors Wire Size Category 22 14 AWG 2mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum 1 2 3 Screw
368. unications format also defines the connection between the controller writing the configuration and the module itself The number and type of choices varies depending on what module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chassis TIP When you select a Listen only Communications Format only the General and Connection tabs appear when you view a module s properties in RSLogix 5000 Controllers that want to listen to module but not own it use the listen only communications formats Input Module Formats Table 6 2 lists the communications formats used with input modules Table 6 2 lf you want the input module to return this data choose this communication format Modules that offer this format The module returns only general fault and input data Input data 1756 1A16 IA16I _1A32 The module returns input data with the value of the CST timestamped input data a Ta system clock from its local chassis when the input data NIG Vie i changed kaoa The 1756 CNB module collects all digital input words in Rack optimization the remote chassis and sends them to the controller as a single rack image This connection type limits the status and diagnostic information available These choices have the same definition as the Listen only input data similarly named options above except that they are Listen only CST timestamped input data listen only connections Listen only rack optimization The module returns input d
369. up basis 1756 0B161 7 None Fused IFM can be used to protect 5x20mm SOC p n outputs See publication 1492 2 12 4A MQ2 4A Quick acting 1756 0B161s 7 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 1756 0B832 7 None Fused IFM can be used to protect ox20mm Littelfuse p n outputs See publication 1492 2 12 800mA SP001 1003 or Schurter p n 216 800 1756 0C3 6 None Fused IFM can be used to protect 9x20mm SOC p n outputs See publication 1492 2 12 4A MQ2 4A Quick acting 1756 0G16 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 8 1756 OH8 6 7 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 2 12 8 1756 OV16E 2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis Electronically fused 1756 OV32E 2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis Relay 1756 0W 161 None Fused IFM can be used to protect 5x20mm SOC p n outputs See publication 1492 2 12 6 3A MT 4 6 3A Medium lag channel it is likely that the transistor or relay associated wi 1756 0X81 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protec principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that c been reached All other channels with a NUT of that group will continue to operate as directed by the module master CPU Bridge etc provide overload protection In the event
370. urable 200us Short Inrush Current 250mA peak decaying to lt 37 without activation in 22ms Change of State on Inputs Software configurable Within 2001s Cyclic Update Time User selectable 100us minimum 750ms maximum Isolation Voltage Group to group User to system 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s 250V maximum continuous 100 tested at 2546V dc for 1s Module Keying Backplane Software configurable RTB Screw Torque NEMA 7 9 inch pounds 0 8 1Nm RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB 1756 TBNH or TBSH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch 8mm maximum Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 4 Module Specific Information Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged
371. ure 5 8 Housing Groove Side edge of RTB RTB 20858 M 1756 TBCH RTB shown for reference 2 Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place IMPORTANT If additional wire routing space is required for your application use extended depth housing 1756 TBE Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Choosing the Extended Depth Housing Maximum Area 336mm Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 9 There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your ControlLogix digital I O module standard depth or extended depth When you order an RTB for your I O module you receive a standard depth housing with the RTB If your application uses heavy gauge wiring you can order an extended depth housing This housing does not come with an RTB You can use one of the housings listed in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 This housing should be used with this RTB and allows up to this capacity of wires 1756 TBNH NEMA clamp 336mm2 1756 TBSH Spring clamp 20 position 1756 TBCH Cage clamp 1756 TBS6H Spring clamp 36 position 1756 TBE Any RTB that uses heavy 628mm2 gauge wiring Figure 5 9 shows the difference in terms of capacity between the housing options Titiptim The housings shown are used with a spring clamp RTB but the capacity for each remains the same regardless of RTB type Figure 5 9 Standard Depth Housing Extended Depth Housing Maximum Area 628mm
372. ures The following table lists the configurable features this module supports the default value and the page of the feature s description Feature Default value Page of description Field Power Loss Detection Enabled 3 18 Diagnostic Latch of Information Enabled 349 Communications Format CST timestamped fuse data 6 6 output data Output State in Program Mode fo o T en Output State in Fault Mode Disabled 6 11 Transition from Program State to Fault off 6 11 State Figure 7 20 Daisy chain to other RTBs Group 0 Group 1 L1 ControlBus VAC T y Interface Short GATE 1 a lt Veri a Eel ied OUT 3 L2 S fy No Display Loss of Field Power 41118 M Not used iG a RES EB TGS 2 R HES THe Hes rut IDD Hep ep TAD ID TD MD L1 1 ie ie EN Surge Current Chart 20A Surge 1A 0 Time Smo ne L2 0 OUT 0 OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 ouT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 L2 1 Group 0 Group 1 L2 L1 40183 M LED indicator 40852 M E G gt AC OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 g FUSE0 1234567 K ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 20995 M
373. ut Module Tags Diagnostic Output Module Tass s 1 452 i es2 8e0 Appendix B Using Message Instructions Processing Real Time Control and Module Services One Service Performed Per Instruction Creating a New Tag Enter Message Configuration Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs Resetting a Fuse Performing the Pulse Test and Resetting Latched Diagnostics 0 Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status 464 644 4 3th s toy es ae es Using Tags in Ladder Logic Appendix C Appendix D Determining the Maximum Number of Motor Starters Appendix E Appendix F Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 D 3 Chapter 1 What This Chapter Contains What are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules This chapter describes the ControlLogix digital modules and what you must know and do before you begin to use them Table 1 1 For information about See page What are Controllogix Digital OModules n s mma Using an 1 0 Module in the ControlLogix System 1 2 Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 2 Physical Features of the ControlLogix Digital I O Modules 1 4 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge 1 6 Removal and Insertion Under Power 1 6 ControlLogix digital I O modules are input output modules that provide ON OFF detection and actuation Using the producer consumer network model they can p
374. ve 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions m 2 3 4 5 The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA OUTPUT TO L2 is 4V us maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA I V R At 50mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for mthe output to L2 be sure
375. w E Module Properties Local 6 1756 OA8D 2 1 Enable Diag Program Mode Fault Mode Output Verify Field Power Loss Latching 5 Te Use the pulldown to set the output fault state on the Configuration tab xI 15 1 lt 1 kalika ica ian ian iKa Ka iKa caica ica iam ian iKa TA M Communications Faih If communications fail Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 21 Output Data Echo During normal operation when a processor sends an output command out to the ControlLogix system the diagnostic output module that is targeted for that command will return the commanded state of the output to the system to verify the module received the command and will try to execute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal via a listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the owner controller This feature cannot relay to the system that the field side device connected to the output module has executed the command If your application requires a more detailed response than only acknowledging the receipt of a command see the Field Side Output Verification feature defined later in this chapter Moni
376. w Output State in Fault Mode Transition from Program 4 20 State to Fault State No Load Detection 4 24 Diagnostic Latching 4 11 Output Verify Detection 4 25 1756 OA8D only Field Power Loss Detection 4 19 Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4 Figure 6 5 shows how to configure your diagnostic output module Figure 6 5 A Set the state of each output during program mode and fault mode Module Properties Local 1756 OA8D 2 1 _ x B Enable Output Verify for each output Ss Enable Diagnostics for e Check the box to enable output verify Enable Diag Latching e Clear the box to disable output verify qaqaqa C Enable No Load for each output D Enable Field Power Loss for each output Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish gt gt Help E Enable Diagnostic Latching for each output F Set the state of the outputs if communications fail in program mode Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 6 14 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Editing Configuration After you have set configuration for a module you can review and change your choices You can change configuration data and download it to the controller while online This is called dynamic reconfiguration IMPORTANT Although you can change configuration while online you must go offline to add or delete modules from the
377. ware configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBS6H Conductors Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 7 64 Module Specific Information Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un packaged Non operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un packaged Non operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Un packaged Non operating Thermal Shock 40 to 85 C 40 to 185 F Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Un packaged Non operating Damp Heat 5 to 95 non condensing Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges Radiated RF Immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 30MHz to 1000MHz 10V m
378. ware configurable RTB Screw Torque Cage clamp 4 4 inch pounds 0 4Nm maximum RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Field Wiring Arm and Housing 36 Position RTB 1756 TBCH or TBSGH Conductors _ Wire Size 22 to 14 AWG 0 324 to 2 08 sq mm stranded 3 64 inch 1 2mm insulation maximum Category 1 2 3 Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch 3 2mm maximum Preliminary Publication 1756 UM058D EN P October 2004 Module Specific Information 7 91 Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Op IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb O 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F erating Dry Heat perating Thermal Shoc Storage Temperature IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Un IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Un IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na U Shock 40 0 85 C 40 to 185 F packaged Non operati n packaged Non opera ng Cold packaged Non operating Dry Heat ing Thermal Relative Humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db U 5 to 95 non condensing n packaged Non opera ing Damp Heat Vibration IEC60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500Hz Operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 30g Non operating Shock IEC60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD Immunity EC 61000 4 2 6kV contact discharges 8kV air discharges
379. wer sources are HS 7 used do not exceed the specified D D isolation voltage L2 L1 40176 M Simplified schematic LED indicator 5V IN 0 k AC INPUT Oost a LAA Sl oy 3 L2 0 z Se a p a i i e ST01234567 0 Y H ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K GND Control Bus Display Interface 30338 M 20945 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 1756 IA16 Specifications Module Specific Information 7 3 Number of Inputs 16 8 points common Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Backplane Current 105mA 5 1V de amp 2mA 24V de Total backplane power 0 58W Maximum Power Dissipation Module 5 8W 60 C Thermal Dissipation 18 41 BTU hr On State Voltage Range 74 132V ac 47 63Hz 132V ac Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac On State Current 5mA 74V ac minimum 13mA 132V ac maximum Maximum Off State Voltage 20V Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA Maximum Input Impedance 10 15kQ 60Hz Input Delay Time OFF to ON ON to OFF Hardware Delay 10ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 1ms or 2ms Hardware Delay 8ms maximum Input Filter Time User selectable time 9ms or 18ms Diagnostic Functions Change of State Timestamp of Inputs Software config
380. when a signal is sent to the system over the ControlBus this typical time reflects a filter time of OmS for a DC input This section offers an explanation of the time limitations with ControlLogix I O modules Input Modules As shown below ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at the RTB and process it internally i e hardware delay filter delay ASIC delay before sending a signal to the ControlBus via the Requested Packet Interval RPD or at a Change of State COS occurrence Figure 2 1 Hardware delay Filter delay ASIC delay oj x Varies between modules User configurable 200uS scan Signal sent to and application ControlLogix configuration l backplane EXAMPLE Many factors e g module type voltage temperature if the module is turning ON or OFF affect the signal propogation delay on a module But a typical delay time can be estimated For example if you are turning ON a 1756 IB16 module at 24V dc in 25 C conditions the signal propogation delay is affected by e hardware delay to energize the module typically 290uS on this module e user configurable filter time 0 1 or 2mS e ASIC scan 200uS In the best case scenario e filter time of OmS the 1756 IB16 module has a 490uUS signal propogation delay These times are not guaranteed We list nominal and maximum delay times for each module in Chapter 7 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2
381. with 200Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM at 900Mhz EFT B Immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 2 5kHz on power ports 4kV at 2 5kHz on signal ports Surge Transient IEC 61000 4 5 Immunity 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on power ports 1kV line line DM and 2kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF IEC 61000 4 6 Immunity 10Vrms with 1kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150kHz to 80MHz Enclosure Type Rating None open style Certifications when produc is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations cel European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVD Directive compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS 2064 Industrial Emissions 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing 1756 TBE 2 installation manual 3 4 certification details Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as desc
382. x 24V X3 3V 6 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 7 X5 1V x 24V X3 3V 8 X5 1V x 24V X3 3V g x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 10 X5 1V x 24V X3 3V 11 x5 1V x 24V x3 3V 12 x5 1V x 24V x3 3V 13 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 14 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 15 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 16 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V TOTALS mA W 1 mA W 2 mA W 3 This number This number This number cannot exceed cannot cannot exceed exceed 4000mA 10000mA for 2800mA 1756 PA72 PB72 13000mA for 1756 PA75 PB75 These three wattage values 1 2 3 added together cannot exceed e 70W 40 C For 1756 PA72 PB72 Series A 55W 60 C For 1756 PA72 PB72 Series A e 75W 40 60 C For 1756 PA72 PB72 Series B and 1756 PA75 PB75 Series A We recommend that you copy this worksheet for use in checking the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 C 2 Power Supply Sizing Chart Notes Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Appendix D Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Use this appendix to choose a ControlLogix digital I O module to drive Bulletin 500 Series motor starters in your application The tables below list the number of motor starters 5 sizes are listed for each module that a particular digital I O module can drive IMPORTANT Table D 1 Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 120V ac 60Hz When using the tables remember that the sup
383. x digital output modules Figure 4 3 Bit 31 A communications fault sets all bits A Fuse Blown Field Power Loss No Load or Output Verify condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word in the Module Fault Word A Group 1 A blown fuse for any point group sets the bit for that point group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the appropriate bit bits in the Module Fault Word Group 1 Group 0 ee 1 A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the Field Power Loss Word and also sets the appropriate bits in the Module Fault Word ANo Load condition for any po that point in the No Load Word appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word int sets the bit for and also sets the An Output Verify condi tion for any point set s the bit for that point in the Output Verify Word and also sets the appropriate bit in the Module Faul Word 41457 Preliminary Publicat
384. y he a E D e N Ei Strain relief area A 40201 M OC Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 7 Spring Clamp 1 Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB 2 Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the screwdriver Figure 5 7 ai U lt Strain relief area Saco Recommendations for Wiring Your RTB Consider the following guidelines when wiring your RTB e Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up e Use a tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB e The jumper bar part number is 97739201 Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales representative to order additional jumper bars if necessary For an example of when to use the jumper bar see the 1756 IA16I wiring diagram in Figure 7 2 on page 7 5 e Order and use an extended depth housing Cat No 1756 TBE for applications that require heavy gauge wiring For more information see page 5 9 Preliminary Publication 1756 UMO058D EN P October 2004 5 8 Installing the ControlLogix I O Module Assembling The Removable Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring Terminal Block an d the connections when the RTB is seated on the module Housing 1 Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side edges of the RTB Fig

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents